EAM: Foundation Training Workbook

EAM
May 22, 2019
Course code: 01_9031810_IEN0001_EEN
Legal Notice
Copyright © 2019 Infor. All rights reserved.

Important Notices
The material contained in this publication (including any supplementary information) constitutes and
contains confidential and proprietary information of Infor.
By gaining access to the attached, you acknowledge and agree that the material (including any
modification, translation or adaptation of the material) and all copyright, trade secrets and all other right,
title and interest therein, are the sole property of Infor and that you shall not gain right, title or interest in
the material (including any modification, translation or adaptation of the material) by virtue of your review
thereof other than the non-exclusive right to use the material solely in connection with and the furtherance
of your license and use of software made available to your company from Infor pursuant to a separate
agreement, the terms of which separate agreement shall govern your use of this material and all
supplemental related materials ("Purpose").
In addition, by accessing the enclosed material, you acknowledge and agree that you are required to
maintain such material in strict confidence and that your use of such material is limited to the Purpose
described above. Although Infor has taken due care to ensure that the material included in this publication
is accurate and complete, Infor cannot warrant that the information contained in this publication is
complete, does not contain typographical or other errors, or will meet your specific requirements. As such,
Infor does not assume and hereby disclaims all liability, consequential or otherwise, for any loss or
damage to any person or entity which is caused by or relates to errors or omissions in this publication
(including any supplementary information), whether such errors or omissions result from negligence,
accident or any other cause.
Without limitation, U.S. export control laws and other applicable export and import laws govern your use
of this material and you will neither export or re-export, directly or indirectly, this material nor any related
materials or supplemental information in violation of such laws or use such materials for any purpose
prohibited by such laws.

Trademark Acknowledgements
The word and design marks set forth herein are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Infor and/or
related affiliates and subsidiaries. All rights reserved. All other company, product, trade, or service names
referenced may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of contents
About this workbook ................................................................................................................................ 12
Course overview ....................................................................................................................................... 14
Course description and agenda .............................................................................................................. 15
Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview ........................................................................... 21
EAM application overview ....................................................................................................................... 22
Exercise 1.1: Log in to EAM ................................................................................................................ 23
Managing a personal account ................................................................................................................. 24
Demo 1.2: Manage a personal account .............................................................................................. 24
Navigation and user interface ................................................................................................................. 25
The user interface ............................................................................................................................... 25
Demo 1.3: Navigate the user interface ............................................................................................... 27
Screen layout ...................................................................................................................................... 27
Demo 1.4: Display List View versus Record View (Split Screen) ....................................................... 28
Processing records in lists .................................................................................................................. 28
Exercise 1.5: Process records in a list using filters, sorting, resizing, and exporting ......................... 30
Fields ................................................................................................................................................... 30
Updating fields .................................................................................................................................... 30
Entering information into fields ............................................................................................................ 31
Demo 1.6: Enter and update fields from List View .............................................................................. 32
Associating documents ....................................................................................................................... 32
Demo 1.7: Associate documents to a record ...................................................................................... 33
Managing comments ........................................................................................................................... 33
Demo 1.8: Manage comments ............................................................................................................ 34
Associating items to a record .............................................................................................................. 34
Demo 1.9: Associate items to a record ............................................................................................... 34
Exercise 1.10: Associate items to a record and manage comments .................................................. 34
Screen cache .......................................................................................................................................... 35
Demo 1.11: Using screen cache ......................................................................................................... 35
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 36
Lesson 2: EAM equipment management ................................................................................................ 37
Equipment information ............................................................................................................................ 38
Setting up initial equipment information .................................................................................................. 39
Set up equipment classes ................................................................................................................... 39
Set up categories ................................................................................................................................ 39
Exercise 2.1: Set up basic equipment information .............................................................................. 39
Defining equipment ................................................................................................................................. 40
Defining assets .................................................................................................................................... 40
Defining positions ................................................................................................................................ 40
Defining systems ................................................................................................................................. 40
Defining locations ................................................................................................................................ 41
Exercise 2.2: Define equipment .......................................................................................................... 41
Changing an equipment number......................................................................................................... 41
Demo 2.3: Change an equipment number .......................................................................................... 41
Equipment hierarchies ............................................................................................................................ 42
Equipment structure examples ........................................................................................................... 42
Locations and equipment structure ..................................................................................................... 43
Defining equipment hierarchies .......................................................................................................... 44
Viewing equipment hierarchies ........................................................................................................... 44

4
 Equipment hierarchy actions ............................................................................................................... 45
Viewing a parent record ...................................................................................................................... 46
Exercise 2.4: Create and maintain equipment hierarchy .................................................................... 46
Defining closing codes ............................................................................................................................ 47
Exercise 2.5: Define closing codes ..................................................................................................... 47
Equipment configuration and generation ................................................................................................ 48
Demo 2.6: Configure and generate equipment ................................................................................... 48
Defining meter information ...................................................................................................................... 49
Exercise 2.7: Define and review meter information ............................................................................ 49
Setting up warranties .............................................................................................................................. 50
Associate warranties with equipment.................................................................................................. 50
Warranty for parts ............................................................................................................................... 50
Demo 2.8: Set up equipment and parts warranties ............................................................................ 51
Maintaining equipment information ......................................................................................................... 52
Transfer equipment between organizations ........................................................................................ 52
View and modify equipment information ............................................................................................. 52
Exercise 2.9: Maintain equipment information .................................................................................... 52
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 53
Lesson 3: Work configuration ................................................................................................................. 54
Work setup overview ............................................................................................................................... 55
Defining trades .................................................................................................................................... 55
Defining trade rates ............................................................................................................................. 56
Defining supplier trade rates ............................................................................................................... 56
Exercise 3.1: Define trades ................................................................................................................. 56
Qualifications and trades .................................................................................................................... 56
Defining qualifications ......................................................................................................................... 58
Demo 3.2: Define a qualification ......................................................................................................... 58
Defining employee information ................................................................................................................ 59
Defining employee codes .................................................................................................................... 59
Defining wage rates for employees ..................................................................................................... 59
Recording labor availability exceptions ............................................................................................... 59
Associating qualifications with employee codes ................................................................................. 59
Transferring employees between organizations ................................................................................. 60
Exercise 3.3: Define employee information ........................................................................................ 60
Defining shift information ......................................................................................................................... 61
Exercise 3.4: Define shift information ................................................................................................. 61
Reviewing material lists for work order planning ..................................................................................... 62
Exercise 3.5: Set up and copy material lists ....................................................................................... 62
Defining permits ...................................................................................................................................... 63
Demo 3.6: Define a permit and maintain permit body comments....................................................... 63
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 64
Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance ............................................................................. 65
Types of repeatable tasks ....................................................................................................................... 66
Checklist types ........................................................................................................................................ 67
Defining task plan information ................................................................................................................. 68
Task plan instructions ......................................................................................................................... 68
Task plan suppliers ............................................................................................................................. 68
Task plan prices .................................................................................................................................. 68
Task plan checklists ............................................................................................................................ 68
Associating qualifications with task plans ........................................................................................... 69
Exercise 4.1: Define task plans ........................................................................................................... 69
Operator checklist ................................................................................................................................... 70
5
 Demo 4.2: Use an operator checklist .................................................................................................. 70
Standard work orders .............................................................................................................................. 71
Exercise 4.3: Define a standard work order ........................................................................................ 71
Demo 4.4: Generate a work order using a standard work order ........................................................ 71
Preventive maintenance work orders ...................................................................................................... 72
PM routes and equipment within routes.............................................................................................. 72
Demo 4.5: Define PM routes for equipment ....................................................................................... 72
PM schedules ...................................................................................................................................... 72
Perform On/Perform On Day .............................................................................................................. 73
PM schedule types .............................................................................................................................. 73
Nesting references .............................................................................................................................. 74
Defining activities of PM schedules .................................................................................................... 75
Defining equipment for PM schedules ................................................................................................ 75
Equipment routes ................................................................................................................................ 75
Releasing PM work orders .................................................................................................................. 76
Exercise 4.6: Define a PM schedule ................................................................................................... 76
Generate work orders ............................................................................................................................. 77
Demo 4.7: Generate individual preventive maintenance work orders ................................................ 77
Demo 4.8: Generate a work order using the Generate WOs screen .................................................. 77
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 78
Lesson 5: Work management .................................................................................................................. 79
Work order processes ............................................................................................................................. 80
Work order status flow ........................................................................................................................ 80
Creating and approving/rejecting work requests ..................................................................................... 82
Exercise 5.1: Create, approve, and reject work requests ................................................................... 82
Processing work orders and work order activity ..................................................................................... 83
Exercise 5.2: Define and create a work order and work order activity ............................................... 83
Applying transactions to work orders ...................................................................................................... 84
Booking labor for work orders ............................................................................................................. 84
Booking vendor hours for work orders ................................................................................................ 84
Booking labor by employee ................................................................................................................. 84
Booking or scheduling labor for crews ................................................................................................ 84
Exercise 5.3: Add comments to a work order and book labor ............................................................ 85
Managing parts for work orders .............................................................................................................. 86
Exercise 5.4: Manage parts for work orders ....................................................................................... 86
Additional costs for work orders .......................................................................................................... 86
Demo 5.5: Additional costs for work orders ........................................................................................ 86
Entering meter readings .......................................................................................................................... 87
Exercise 5.6: Enter meter readings for work order equipment ........................................................... 87
Viewing and modifying work orders ........................................................................................................ 88
Demo 5.7: View and modify work order information ........................................................................... 88
Procuring services for work orders ..................................................................................................... 88
Scheduling work ...................................................................................................................................... 89
Work order labor availability ................................................................................................................ 89
Labor utilization ................................................................................................................................... 89
Freezing/unfreezing a schedule .......................................................................................................... 90
Exercise 5.8: Schedule work for an individual work order .................................................................. 90
Batch work order scheduling ............................................................................................................... 90
Demo 5.9: Batch work order scheduling ............................................................................................. 90
Completing and closing work orders ....................................................................................................... 91
Closing work orders on the Quick Entry and Quick Close screen ...................................................... 91
Reopening a closed work order .......................................................................................................... 91
6
 Exercise 5.10: Close a work order ...................................................................................................... 91
Entering work orders on the Quick Entry and Quick Close screen ......................................................... 92
Exercise 5.11: Complete and close a work order on the Quick Entry and Quick Close screens ....... 92
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 93
Lesson 6: Material configuration ............................................................................................................. 94
Defining material configuration information ............................................................................................. 95
Lots ..................................................................................................................................................... 95
Tax codes ............................................................................................................................................ 95
Units of measure (UOM) ..................................................................................................................... 96
Creating store bins .................................................................................................................................. 97
Store bins ............................................................................................................................................ 97
Exercise 6.1: Create a store and store bins ........................................................................................ 97
Managing manufacturer information ....................................................................................................... 98
Exercise 6.2: Define and associate manufacturer information ........................................................... 98
Managing suppliers ................................................................................................................................. 99
Defining suppliers................................................................................................................................ 99
Copying suppliers................................................................................................................................ 99
Exercise 6.3: Define a supplier ........................................................................................................... 99
Creating a supplier catalog ............................................................................................................... 100
Exercise 6.4: Create a supplier catalog ............................................................................................ 100
Managing store parts information.......................................................................................................... 101
Creating parts .................................................................................................................................... 101
Associating manufacturers with parts ............................................................................................... 101
Associating suppliers with parts ........................................................................................................ 101
Defining substitute parts ................................................................................................................... 101
Changing part numbers .................................................................................................................... 101
Exercise 6.5: Manage and maintain store parts information ............................................................ 101
Part tracked by asset ............................................................................................................................ 102
Global search for parts ...................................................................................................................... 102
Demo 6.6: Global search for parts .................................................................................................... 102
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 103
Lesson 7: Materials movement .............................................................................................................. 104
Materials movement overview............................................................................................................... 105
Transferring parts .................................................................................................................................. 106
Quick store-to-store transfers ........................................................................................................... 106
Exercise 7.1: Transfer parts .............................................................................................................. 106
Issuing and returning parts .................................................................................................................... 107
Issuing/returning parts from a stock record of a part ........................................................................ 107
Issue/Return Parts screen ................................................................................................................ 107
Demo 7.2: Parts Issue/Return screen ............................................................................................... 108
Exercise 7.3: Issue and return parts from a part’s stock record ....................................................... 108
Viewing and modifying materials information ........................................................................................ 109
Viewing and modifying stock information for parts ........................................................................... 109
Demo 7.4: View and modify part, store, and price information ......................................................... 109
Viewing parts activity ............................................................................................................................. 110
Reviewing physical inventory ................................................................................................................ 111
Demo 7.5: Complete a physical inventory ........................................................................................ 111
Creating and reviewing requisitions ...................................................................................................... 112
Generating requisitions from low stock ............................................................................................. 112
Generating requisitions using the on-demand method ..................................................................... 112
Demo 7.6: Generate a requisition ..................................................................................................... 113
Creating requisitions ......................................................................................................................... 113
7
 Creating requisition headers ............................................................................................................. 113
Adding parts to requisitions ............................................................................................................... 113
Adding services to requisitions ......................................................................................................... 114
Copying requisitions .......................................................................................................................... 114
Exercise 7.7: Create and copy a requisition ..................................................................................... 114
Reviewing automatic purchase order generation ............................................................................. 115
Demo 7.8: Review automatic purchase order generation................................................................. 115
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 116
Lesson 8: Purchasing ............................................................................................................................. 117
Purchasing processes ........................................................................................................................... 118
Approving or rejecting part requisitions ................................................................................................. 119
Exercise 8.1: Approve/reject a part requisition ................................................................................. 119
Creating and modifying purchase orders .............................................................................................. 120
Adding parts/services ........................................................................................................................ 120
Extra charges/discounts .................................................................................................................... 121
Copying an existing purchase order ................................................................................................. 121
Exercise 8.2: Create and modify a purchase order .......................................................................... 122
Demo 8.3: Create a purchase order from a requisition ..................................................................... 122
Demo 8.4: Copy a purchase order .................................................................................................... 122
Receiving services ................................................................................................................................ 123
Exercise 8.5: Receive services on the Book PO Labor screen ........................................................ 123
Demo 8.6: Receive services on the Book Vendor Hours screen ...................................................... 123
Receiving and returning parts ............................................................................................................... 124
Receiving parts against purchase orders ......................................................................................... 124
Viewing processed lines for purchase order receipts ....................................................................... 124
Creating non-purchase order receipts .............................................................................................. 124
Exercise 8.7: Receive parts .............................................................................................................. 125
Returning parts to a supplier ............................................................................................................. 125
Exercise 8.8: Return parts to a supplier ............................................................................................ 125
Recording invoice vouchers .................................................................................................................. 126
Creating invoice vouchers ................................................................................................................. 126
Creating invoice voucher lines from purchase order lines ................................................................ 126
Entering extra charges or discounts to invoice voucher lines ........................................................... 127
Creating costs for invoice vouchers .................................................................................................. 127
Viewing invoice voucher line item information .................................................................................. 127
Demo 8.9: Create and book invoice vouchers .................................................................................. 127
Viewing transactions for purchase orders ............................................................................................. 128
Demo 8.10: View purchase order transaction and revision history .................................................. 128
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 129
Lesson 9: Metrics and reporting ........................................................................................................... 130
Start Center overview ............................................................................................................................ 131
Inbox overview ...................................................................................................................................... 132
Exercise 9.1: Personalize the Inbox.................................................................................................. 132
Key Performance Indicator (KPI) overview ........................................................................................... 133
Exercise 9.2: Personalize the KPIs ................................................................................................... 133
Charts overview..................................................................................................................................... 134
Demo 9.3: Display a chart ................................................................................................................. 134
Managing a Dataspy ............................................................................................................................. 135
Specifying Dataspy criteria ............................................................................................................... 135
Exercise 9.4: Manage a Dataspy ...................................................................................................... 136
Running reports ..................................................................................................................................... 137
Demo 9.5: Run a report .................................................................................................................... 137
8
 Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 138
Lesson 10: Project management ........................................................................................................... 139
Defining project information .................................................................................................................. 140
Budget codes .................................................................................................................................... 140
Exercise 10.1: Create a project budget............................................................................................. 140
Setting up a project ............................................................................................................................... 141
Parent and child projects .................................................................................................................. 141
Associating pre-defined budget codes with projects......................................................................... 141
Linking default budget codes with projects ....................................................................................... 141
Granting purchasing authorization permissions for projects ............................................................. 141
Viewing project hierarchy .................................................................................................................. 141
Demo 10.2: Set up a project ............................................................................................................. 142
Creating project work orders ................................................................................................................. 143
Creating new project work orders ..................................................................................................... 143
Associating existing work orders with projects ................................................................................. 143
Generating shutdown work orders .................................................................................................... 143
Viewing all work orders associated with projects .............................................................................. 143
Demo 10.3: Create a project work order ........................................................................................... 143
Viewing project purchase orders ........................................................................................................... 144
Demo 10.4: Review project-associated purchase orders ................................................................. 144
Comprehensive EAM process............................................................................................................... 145
Scenario: Perform EAM processing procedures ............................................................................... 145
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 153
Appendices .............................................................................................................................................. 154
Appendix A: User accounts for multi-tenant environment ..................................................................... 155
Appendix B: User accounts for SDL environment ................................................................................. 159
Exercises and demos ............................................................................................................................. 163
Exercise 1.1: Log in to EAM .............................................................................................................. 164
Demo 1.2: Manage a personal account ............................................................................................ 165
Demo 1.3: Navigate the user interface ............................................................................................. 166
Demo 1.4: Display List View versus Record View (Split Screen) ..................................................... 167
Exercise 1.5: Process records in a list using filters, sorting, resizing, and exporting ....................... 168
Demo 1.6: Enter and update fields from List View............................................................................ 171
Demo 1.7: Associate documents to a record .................................................................................... 172
Demo 1.8: Manage comments .......................................................................................................... 174
Demo 1.9: Associate items to a record ............................................................................................. 175
Exercise 1.10: Associate items to a record and manage comments ................................................ 177
Demo 1.11: Using screen cache ....................................................................................................... 180
Exercise 2.1: Set up basic equipment information ............................................................................ 181
Exercise 2.2: Define equipment ........................................................................................................ 183
Demo 2.3: Change an equipment number ........................................................................................ 185
Exercise 2.4: Create and maintain equipment hierarchy .................................................................. 186
Exercise 2.5: Define closing codes ................................................................................................... 188
Demo 2.6: Configure and generate equipment ................................................................................. 189
Exercise 2.7: Define and review meter information .......................................................................... 191
Demo 2.8: Set up equipment and parts warranties .......................................................................... 193
Exercise 2.9: Maintain equipment information .................................................................................. 195
Exercise 3.1: Define trades ............................................................................................................... 197
Demo 3.2: Define a qualification ....................................................................................................... 198
Exercise 3.3: Define employee information ...................................................................................... 199
Exercise 3.4: Define shift information ............................................................................................... 201
Exercise 3.5: Set up and copy material lists ..................................................................................... 203
9
 Demo 3.6: Define a permit and maintain permit body comments..................................................... 204
Exercise 4.1: Define task plans ......................................................................................................... 205
Demo 4.2: Use an operator checklist ................................................................................................ 207
Exercise 4.3: Define a standard work order ...................................................................................... 209
Demo 4.4: Generate a work order using a standard work order ...................................................... 210
Demo 4.5: Define PM routes for equipment ..................................................................................... 211
Exercise 4.6: Define PM schedule .................................................................................................... 212
Demo 4.7: Generate individual preventive maintenance work orders .............................................. 214
Demo 4.8: Generate work orders using the Generate WOs screen ................................................. 215
Exercise 5.1: Create, approve, and reject work requests ................................................................. 216
Exercise 5.2: Define and create a work order and work order activity ............................................. 218
Exercise 5.3: Add comments to a work order and book labor .......................................................... 220
Exercise 5.4: Manage parts for work orders ..................................................................................... 222
Demo 5.5: Additional costs for work orders ...................................................................................... 225
Exercise 5.6: Enter meter readings for work order equipment ......................................................... 226
Demo 5.7: View and modify work order information ......................................................................... 227
Exercise 5.8: Schedule work for an individual work order ................................................................ 228
Demo 5.9: Batch work order scheduling ........................................................................................... 229
Exercise 5.10: Close a work order .................................................................................................... 231
Exercise 5.11: Complete and close a work order on the Quick Entry and Quick Close screens ..... 232
Exercise 6.1: Create a store and store bins ...................................................................................... 234
Exercise 6.2: Define and associate manufacturer information ......................................................... 235
Exercise 6.3: Define a supplier ......................................................................................................... 236
Exercise 6.4: Create a supplier catalog ............................................................................................ 238
Exercise 6.5: Manage and maintain store parts information ............................................................ 239
Demo 6.6: Global search for parts .................................................................................................... 242
Exercise 7.1: Transfer parts .............................................................................................................. 243
Demo 7.2: Issue/Return Parts screen ............................................................................................... 245
Exercise 7.3: Issue and return parts from a part’s stock record ....................................................... 246
Demo 7.4: View and modify part, store, and price information ......................................................... 247
Demo 7.5: Complete a physical inventory ........................................................................................ 248
Demo 7.6: Generate a requisition ..................................................................................................... 249
Exercise 7.7: Create and copy a requisition ..................................................................................... 251
Demo 7.8: Review automatic purchase order generation................................................................. 254
Exercise 8.1: Approve/reject a part requisition ................................................................................. 255
Exercise 8.2: Create and modify a purchase order .......................................................................... 257
Demo 8.3: Create a purchase order from a requisition ..................................................................... 259
Demo 8.4: Copy a purchase order .................................................................................................... 260
Exercise 8.5: Receive services on the Book PO Labor screen ........................................................ 261
Demo 8.6: Receive services on the Book Vendor Hours tab ........................................................... 262
Exercise 8.7: Receive parts .............................................................................................................. 263
Exercise 8.8: Return parts to a supplier ............................................................................................ 265
Demo 8.9: Create and book invoice vouchers .................................................................................. 266
Demo 8.10: View purchase order transaction and revision history .................................................. 268
Exercise 9.1: Personalize the Inbox.................................................................................................. 269
Exercise 9.2: Personalize the KPIs ................................................................................................... 271
Demo 9.3: Display a chart ................................................................................................................. 272
Exercise 9.4: Manage a Dataspy ...................................................................................................... 273
Demo 9.5: Run a report .................................................................................................................... 275
Exercise 10.1: Create a project budget............................................................................................. 276
Demo 10.2: Set up a project ............................................................................................................. 277
Demo 10.3: Create a project work order ........................................................................................... 279
10
Demo 10.4: Review project-associated purchase orders ................................................................. 281
Scenario ............................................................................................................................................ 282

11
About this workbook
Welcome to this Infor Education course! We hope you will find this learning experience enjoyable and
instructive. This Training Workbook is designed to support the following forms of learning:
• Classroom instructor-led training
• Virtual instructor-led training
• Self-directed learning
This Training Workbook is not intended for use as a product user guide.

Activity data
You will be asked to complete some practice exercises during this course. Step-by-step instructions are
provided in this guide to assist you with completing the exercises. Where necessary, data columns are
included for your reference.
Your instructor will provide more information on systems used in class, including server addresses, login
IDs, and passwords.

Self-directed learning
If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, there may be instructor-recorded presentations
and/or simulations available to assist you.
If instructor-recorded presentations are available, a hyperlink to the recording will be included on the first
page of each corresponding Lesson.
If simulations are available, the demos and exercises throughout this Training Workbook will include
hyperlinks that allow you to view and/or practice the execution of the demo or exercise in a simulated
training environment.

Learning Libraries
Learning Libraries in Infor Campus include learning materials that are available to you online, anytime,
anywhere. These materials can supplement instructor-led training, providing you with additional learning
resources to support your day-to-day business tasks and activities.
Please note that if you accessed this Training Workbook directly via a Learning Library, you will not have
access to the Infor Education Training Environment that is provided with all instructor-led and most self-
directed learning course versions, as referenced above. Therefore, you will not be able to practice the
exercises in the specific Training Environment for which the exercises in this Training Workbook were
written.

12 About this workbook

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Symbols used in this workbook

Exercise Your notes Question

Demo Important note Answer

Scenario or Discussion Critical note Task simulation

For your reference Navigation back Navigation down

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 13

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Course overview
Estimated time
40 hours

Learning objectives
Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:
• Describe how to access and navigate Enterprise Asset Management (EAM).
• Explain how to set up, create, and manage equipment in EAM.
• Explain how to define and configure work-related information.
• Discuss how to create and manage repeatable and basic preventive maintenance work orders.
• Describe how to create, manage, schedule, and close work orders.
• Describe how to define, configure, and manage materials.
• Summarize the processes and tasks associated with the movement of materials.
• Explain the processes and tasks associated with purchasing.
• Describe how to personalize the Start Center, use Dataspys, and run reports.
• Describe the main processes and functions associated with projects.

Topics
• Course description and agenda

14 Course overview
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Course description and agenda
The purpose of this course is to introduce the essential core functions of the EAM application suite with
hands-on training of the most commonly implemented processes and configurations. This training is for
version 11.4 and previous versions.
Previous course name/code: EAM version 11.3/01_0031130_IEN0394_EEN.

Course duration
40 hours

Prerequisite knowledge
None

Audience
• Customer User
• Pre-Sales Consultant
• Business Consultant
• Technical Consultant
• Support
• System Administrator

System requirements
• EDU: EAM MTS 11.4 Training Environment

Reference materials
EAM reference materials are available from the following locations:
• EAM Help menu
• Infor Xtreme®

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 15

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Course agenda
The agenda below details the contents of this course, including lesson-level learning objectives and
supporting objectives.

Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated

time
(hours)

Course overview Review course expectations 0.5

1 EAM application and Describe how to access and navigate 3

navigation overview Enterprise Asset Management (EAM).
• Define EAM.
• Identify the business areas supported by
the EAM application.
• Describe how to manage a personal
account.
• Describe how to use the navigation
features to enter basic information in the
EAM user interface.
• Describe how to manage records and
relate external information to a record.

2 EAM equipment Explain how to set up, create, and manage 6

management equipment in EAM.
• Describe the EAM equipment module.
• Describe how to set up basic equipment
class, category, and department
information.
• Describe how to define equipment as an
asset, position, system, and location.
• Describe how to change an equipment
number.
• Discuss equipment hierarchies.
• Define closing codes.
• Describe the functionality for equipment
configuration and generation.
• Define meter information.
• Describe how to set up warranties and
warranty parts.
• Describe how to maintain equipment
information.

16 Course overview
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated
time
(hours)

3 Work configuration Explain how to define and configure work- 4

related information.
• Describe work setup.
• Define trades and qualifications.
• Define employee information.
• Define shift information.
• Describe how to set up and copy a
materials list.
• Define a permit.

4 Repeatable and preventive Discuss how to create and manage 3.5

maintenance repeatable and basic preventive
maintenance work orders.
• Describe the use of task plans.
• Describe operator checklist
functionality.
• Describe the use of standard work
orders.
• Describe how to define and schedule
repeatable and preventive maintenance
work orders.
• Describe how to generate multiple work
orders using the Generate WO screen.

5 Work management Describe how to create, manage, schedule, 5

and close work orders.
• Discuss the work order process.
• Describe how to create, approve and
reject a work request.
• Describe how to process work orders
and work order activity.
• Describe how to apply transactions to
work orders.
• Describe how to manage parts for work
orders.
• Describe how to enter meter readings
for work order equipment.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 17

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated
time
(hours)

• Describe how to view and modify work

orders.
• Describe how to schedule work for a
work order.
• Describe how to complete and close a
work order.

6 Material configuration Describe how to define, configure, and 3.5

manage materials.
• Explain how to define material
configuration information.
• Describe how to create store bins.
• Describe how to manage store parts
information.
• Describe how to manage manufacturer
information.
• Describe how to define supplier
information.
• Describe how to manage store and
stock information.

7 Materials movement Summarize the processes and tasks 3

associated with the movement of materials.
• Discuss materials movement.
• Describe how to transfer parts.
• Describe how to issue and return parts.
• Describe how to create a requisition.
• Describe how to reserve parts.
• Describe how to view and modify
materials information.
• Describe how to view parts activity.
• Describe how to complete a physical
inventory.

8 Purchasing Explain the processes and tasks associated 4

with purchasing.
• Describe how to approve or reject a
requisition.

18 Course overview
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated
time
(hours)

• Describe how to create and modify

purchase orders.
• Describe how to receive and return
parts.
• Describe how to record invoice
vouchers.
• Describe how to view purchase order
revision history.

9 Metrics and reporting Describe how to personalize the Start 2.5

Center, use Dataspys, and run reports.
• Define the Start Center.
• Describe how to personalize the Inbox.
• Describe how to personalize Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs).
• Describe how to display a chart.
• Explain how to create and maintain a
Dataspy.
• Describe how to run reports.

10 Project management Describe the main processes and functions 3.5

associated with projects.
• Describe how to define initial project
information.
• Describe how to set up a project.
• Describe how to create project work
orders.
• Describe how to view project purchase
orders.
• Describe how to set up fundamental
procedures that represent the core
functionality of EAM.

Course summary Debrief course. .5

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 19

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Appendix/Appendices
This section contains information that is not part of the instructional content of this course, but provides
additional related reference information.

Appendix Appendix title Content description

Appendix A User accounts This appendix provides a reference for student and instructor
login credentials.

20 Course overview
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 1: EAM application and
navigation overview
Estimated time
2.5 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to access and navigate EAM. In this lesson,
you will:
• Define Infor EAM.
• Identify the business areas supported by the EAM application.
• Describe how to manage a personal account.
• Describe how to use the navigation features to enter basic information in the EAM user interface.
• Describe how to manage records and relate external information to a record.

Topics
• EAM application overview
• Managing a personal account
• Navigation and user interface
• Screen cache

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 21

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
EAM application overview
Infor EAM is the most configurable enterprise-grade asset management solution on the market. It gives
you the power to improve capital asset management in ways that increase reliability, enhance predictive
maintenance, ensure regulatory compliance, reduce energy usage, and support sustainability initiatives.
Available in industry-specific editions, it also gives you unparalleled flexibility to zero in on the specialized,
industry requirements that can turn your company's asset management into a competitive advantage.

Infor EAM will be referred to as EAM for the remainder of this Training Workbook.

EAM supports the following core business areas:

• Asset management
• Work management
• Materials management
• Purchasing
• Project management
• Scheduling
EAM is an enterprise-wide software application offering:
• Best-in-class asset management
• Industry-specific functionality
• Energy management
• Performance management
The EAM user interface is very simple to use. It combines the best features of a web browser and
Oracle® application design. EAM uses Extensible Markup Language (XML) to display dynamic data
based on an individual's configured preferences. Users who are new to EAM and more seasoned users
will both find the interface intuitive.
The application is a Web-architected, Internet-based application, accessible via most commercial
browsers. Additionally, your browser must be set up to allow cookies and enable JavaScript before
accessing the login page.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

22 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Note: If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, follow the log in instructions
provided to you and do not perform Exercise 1.1.

Exercise 1.1: Log in to EAM

In this exercise, you will log in to EAM.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 23

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Managing a personal account
A personal account contains your email address, system language, login password, and the duration that
you want success messages to display. Personal account information is accessed and can be modified,
as needed, through the My Account drop-down option on the screen header. It is important to always
save My Account information upon exiting the screen.

• If you change your user password and have any report schedules in Infor EAM
Advanced Reporting, you must renew your credentials in Infor EAM Advanced
Reporting. Contact your system administrator for more information.
• If Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) (single sign-on, where your network
login and password are passed to EAM for access control) is enabled, the Current
Password, New Password, and Confirm Password fields will not change these settings.
• If you modify Success Msg. Timeout or Language, you must log out, close all browser
sessions, and then log in to see the changes.

Demo 1.2: Manage a personal account

This demonstration shows how to manage a personal account.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

24 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Navigation and user interface
EAM is an Internet-based application. For Internet Explorer® (IE) versions 9 and higher, compatibility
mode must be enabled in order to access the EAM environment. EAM version 11 and higher are “browser
agnostic” and can be accessed using any commercial browser, including Google Chrome™, Internet
Explorer, Safari®, etc. If you want to bookmark the EAM login screen as a shortcut link, you may provide
the user ID in the URL. Additionally, your browser must be set up to allow cookies and enable
JavaScript® before accessing the login screens.
This lesson reviews EAM features and functions for fields, lists, records, associating documents or items
to a record, and managing comments.

The user interface

Once accessed, EAM includes several navigation options that allow you to quickly and easily find the
screens and information you need. You navigate through the system by clicking images, menus, buttons,
tabs, and hyperlinks on each screen.
The following table provides a description of the user interface component, what the component is used
for, and the actions that component performs.

User interface Use to: Actions

component

Header Access basic functions which Click the navigation tabs to access
display on all screens. These the major functional areas or
include: Start Center, My Account, modules within the system. The
Help, About, and Logout. Header options vary based on the
user group setup of the user.

Menu bar Display functions and menus (i.e., Click or hover the cursor over the
Work, Materials, Purchasing, etc.) navigation menus on the menu bar,
that apply to a screen or screen on and the system displays a “drop-
the menu bar. down” menu listing the selectable
forms that apply to that navigation
menu.

Toolbar Access basic system functions Hover the cursor over a button to
(i.e., Save, New Record, Copy, view a pop-up description of the
etc.). button's function.

Tabs Identify screens of information To view additional tabs, click the

associated with a screen within the More drop-down list visible to the far
system. Some tabs are displayed right of the Record View. EAM
by default, and others must be displays a list of additional available
manually added to the screen. tab options. The added tab will not
be saved by default after you log out
of the system. A system
administrator can enable additional

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 25

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 User interface Use to: Actions
component

tabs not shown in the More drop-

down.

Message bar View system messages, errors, View messages after performing an
warnings, and options. action.

Right-click • Insert or update records (menu Right-click mouse

options options).
• Perform screen-specific
functions (screen-level
options).
• Perform common functions
that are available on most
screens, such as audit trail
(system-level options
displayed at the bottom of the
right-click menu).

Split Screen/List Select how to view records. Use the icons at the far right of the
View/Record toolbar to view the entire list (List
View View), the entire record, or a
combination of the two. Press the
middle icon to display List View and
Record View simultaneously. Click
the Expand Right icon to view just
the Record View or click the Expand
Left icon to view just the List View.

Dataspy View records based on a query or Select from available Dataspy

filtered by a set of parameters options in the drop-down or create
your own.

System Perform system functions. Hold + press keys or key

keyboard Examples: CTRL+F9 accesses My combinations
shortcuts Account, CTRL+Q quits EAM, etc.
See the EAM User Guide for a
complete list of keyboard shortcuts.

Help Access the EAM User Guide and • Press CTRL+H

EAM System Administrator Guide.
• Click the down arrow to the left
of Work in the header and select
Help.

26 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
The following image illustrates some of these basic EAM user interface components.

Menu bar
Toolbar Tabs

EAM user interface components

Demo 1.3: Navigate the user interface

This demonstration shows how to navigate the user interface.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Screen layout
The screen in EAM displays records in a Split, List, and or Record View mode depending on the
preferences of the user. The default display format of the screen is defined by the system administrator in
the screen setup. Users can navigate between the three display options as needed.
The Split Screen mode, which is the system default for most screens, provides users with the option to
perform quick searches on key records data (e.g. description, organization) in list format, and then scroll
down and view or edit the record’s details in Record View mode. It is noteworthy that the search
performed in the Split Screen searches all fields visible on the left, List View of the screen. Therefore, a
search in the Work Order screen in Split View for MAINT would display records that contain the word in
the Equipment, WO Description or Department fields.
It is important to note that the records displayed in Split Screen mode are subject to the restrictions
applied by the Dataspy for the given screen. To select a different Dataspy, users need to access the List
View of the form or click the down arrow in the search bar.
The Expand Right icon displays the records in a simple list format, suitable for export to Microsoft®
Excel®. The Dataspy applied to the records is visible on the top-left section of the list. It also allows
access to any additional tabs available for the screen.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 27

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
The Expand Left icon allows users to view details about a record in traditional record view mode. Record
View can be accessed by clicking the Expand Left icon or by double-clicking a record in List View mode.
The following graphic shows the List View Search field above the List View panel and to the right is the
Record View panel.

List View search field

List View Record View

List View Search field, List and Record (Split Screen) views

Demo 1.4: Display List View versus Record View (Split Screen)
This demonstration shows how to display List View, Record View, and Split Screen.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Processing records in lists

A record is a compilation of information about or related to an item. EAM often displays information in list
or tabular format (e.g., List View or pop-up windows). Select a row in a list to view record details. You can
also quickly sort, filter, rearrange or resize fields, as desired.
The following table provides a description of the action and how it is used when processing records in
lists.

Action Use

Select row Select a row from List View and view the associated record in Record
View. EAM enables you to perform functions on the record selected.

28 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Action Use

Define quick filters Filter a list of records on screens (List View) or lookups to display only
those records that meet your specified criteria.
• The third field in the quick filter displays according to that field type
(i.e., text box, drop-down list, lookup, radio button/check box, date).
• EAM applies the filters in addition to any filter criteria specified in a
Dataspy that is applied to the list. Note: Dataspys are discussed later
in this lesson

Sort records Sort a list of records by any column in the list in ascending or descending
order by clicking the column title. Click once to sort the records in
ascending order. Click a second time to sort in descending order.

Arrange columns Drag and drop columns to arrange the order in which they are displayed.
• If the column header is dragged from left to right, EAM places the
column header after the target column.
• If the column header is dragged from right to left, EAM places the
column header before the target column.

Resize columns Click the line between the columns and drag it to increase or decrease
column width.

Save layout Save the layout so that it is used each time you return to that screen after
arranging and/or resizing columns. This feature is not available on a
Global Dataspy and the user will need to create a copy of the Dataspy to
save the new format.

Copy Copy information from one record to another within the same screen.
Copying a record creates an editable copy of the record and contains the
same base data. The Copy Record icon is only available and enabled on
screens with List View and Record View screens.

Export Export records from the EAM database directly into a Microsoft Excel file.
The file can then be viewed using Microsoft Excel.
EAM exports the results of the last query performed, even if those records
are not currently displayed on the screen (e.g., the screen has been
cleared, the number of records exceeds the screen display limit).
The Export to Excel function exports a maximum of 64,000 records.

• Custom fields on forms are displayed at the end of the filter drop-down list. Only custom
fields associated to the entity of the screen AND associated to a class with an
organization, for which the user has query rights, are displayed System Administrators
may choose whether to allow custom fields in Dataspy layouts or quick filter options in
the custom field definition.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 29

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 • To copy a record, you must have insert rights for the organization of the record you are
copying.

Exercise 1.5: Process records in a list using filters, sorting, resizing,

and exporting
In this exercise, you will do the following:
▪ Select rows in a list
▪ Define quick filters on a screen and a lookup
▪ Soft records
▪ Arrange and resize columns in a list and save the new layout
▪ Copy records
▪ Export records
▪ Display a total record count
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Fields
A field is a single topic of information in a record. Required fields, noted by a red asterisk next to the field,
must be completed for a record to be valid. Fields that display with blue dots next to them indicate that the
field is hyperlinked. A hyperlink is a configurable link to another screen, which allows you to view and
retrieve information from another screen. Hyperlinks are configured by your system administrator.
If a field is not displayed, it is probably hidden. To resolve hidden fields, you will need to launch Screen
Designer to view all available fields. Right-clicking a field provides a list of options: Required, Protected,
Optional, Hidden, and Not Available. If the option displays with a gray background, that is the current
setting for the field. Simply select a different option to change the current setting.

Updating fields
The update fields feature is available only on the following List View screens:
• Work Orders
• Parts
• Equipment (assets, systems, positions, or locations)
• Requisitions
• Purchase Orders
The following table describes the action and result of that action.

Action Result

Right-click (in a field, Updates selected rows

in a grid)

30 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Action Result

Press Ctrl+click Selects/deselects an individual row; multiple individual row selections can
be made

Press Shift+click Selects/deselects all rows between the first selected row and the last
selected row

Not all fields are available for update in the right-click options. If a field is protected or hidden,
it is not included in the list. In addition, some fields with associated special business rules
(e.g., prompting the user with a yes/no question) are excluded.

• The header at the top of the screen will always show the first record selected.
Therefore, if the list frame has multiple records selected, EAM remains on the record
displayed in the header. The multi-selection is lost when you leave the screen.
• If a record being displayed in the header is no longer selected, EAM displays the top-
most selected record in the header.

Entering information into fields

There are six types of fields available when entering information into fields. The following table identifies
the field type and how the information is entered for each field type.

Field type Enter information by…

Text box Typing information directly into the field.

Drop-down list Clicking the field's drop-down arrow to select field input from a drop-down
list.

Lookup (AKA "LOV" Clicking the field's search icon or pressing F9 to display a lookup screen
list of values) from which to select field input.

Date • Clicking the field's calendar icon to display a calendar from which to
select date input.
• Clicking in the field and then pressing the SPACEBAR to enter the
current date and timestamp, where applicable.
• Typing a date in a numeric format (e.g., 073017).

Radio button Selecting the radio button when there is a list of two or more options that
are mutually exclusive and you must select the choice.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 31

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Field type Enter information by…

Check box Selecting the check box when there are lists of options and you must
select any number of choices. You can have single or multiple check
boxes.

• EAM only displays certain fields by default prior to customization. Your system
administrator has the rights to hide (hidden fields) and unhide fields as necessary.
• Search fields: If you type the first few characters of the value for which you are
searching, and then click the Lookup icon or the F9 key, all values containing the
characters you entered display.

Demo 1.6: Enter and update fields from List View

This demonstration shows how to enter and update fields.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Associating documents
Documents are associated to a record using the Documents tab. When associating a document to a
record, you specify whether EAM copies and/or prints document attachments that are linked to work
orders. For example, a technician who created an equipment record needs to attach a document to the
record (e.g., schematics, drawings, warranties).
The copy and print options displayed on the Documents screen change depending on the record to which
you are associating a document. Documents can be created as records in EAM and associated with
various entities. Such documents are uploaded into the system and are always available for printing.
Documents can also be uploaded by providing a link to the document location, e.g., a shared drive. In
such cases the document, if not uploaded into EAM, might not be available for a user who doesn’t have
access to the drive.
A document can also be disassociated from a record. When a document is disassociated, EAM removes
the document link from the record and updates the Documents list.

• Documents need to be saved as pdf files in order to be automatically printed with

records.
• Modifying the copy settings of a document does not affect the copy settings of the
document already attached to any existing purchase orders or work orders.

32 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.7: Associate documents to a record
This demonstration shows how to associate documents to a record.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Managing comments
Comments provide additional information relevant to a record. Comments are entered and managed
through Add/Edit Comment screens in most EAM system modules. An Add/Edit Comments pop-up
window is accessed through the Comments tab or an Add/Edit Comments link on certain screens.
Through this screen, you can also specify whether the comment should print with the specified record. In
addition, comments automatically note the user and the time stamp.
The steps for entering comments are the same regardless of how you access the Add/Edit Comments
screen. To preserve all comments, do not erase existing comment text when modifying the comment.
Comments can be audited enabling users to retain all comment changes.
The Add/Edit Comments screen has its own toolbar, which includes a spell-check feature.

• To view or edit comments entered in another language, select the desired language.
The system displays that language's comments. If no comments were entered for the
selected language, EAM displays the comments for the user's default language.
• The Comments toolbar only displays when the HTMLCOMM install parameter is turned
on.
• The spell-check feature relies on a third-party product called IE Spell to be installed. IE
Spell can be obtained at www.iespell.com.

The following table identifies the action and how that action is used for managing comments.

Action Use to…

Save Save an added or modified comment.

Erase Clear a comment, but not delete the link to the comment record.

Delete Delete the link to the comment record.

The Comments Audit Trail allows you to view comment history. However, you can only view audit
information you have established audit control and changes have been made to the fields under audit.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 33

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.8: Manage comments
This demonstration shows how to manage comments.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Associating items to a record

Associate addresses
Mail, invoice, and delivery addresses can be associated with records and functions. Other contact
information, such as a mailing and email address, telephone, and fax number can also be captured in a
record.
An address record can be deleted by selecting the address to be deleted and then clicking Delete
Address. EAM deletes the record and updates the Addresses list.

Associate parts
Parts can be associated with a number of entities in EAM. The functionality is particularly useful when
defining a parts-associated list (sometimes referred to as bill of materials) for an equipment record. The
parts associated list displays the quantities of the part needed for the equipment, as well as the storeroom
availability of the parts.
To remove an associated part, select the part to remove, and then click Remove Part. EAM removes the
record and updates the parts associated list.

Demo 1.9: Associate items to a record

This demonstration shows how to associate items to a record.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Exercise 1.10: Associate items to a record and manage comments

In this exercise, you will associate items to a record and manage comments.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

34 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Screen cache
EAM provides the ability to add a screen-to-screen cache. Add to Screen Cache is a right-click option on
most screens. Once a screen is added to screen cache, the next time the user logs in, the newly added
screens will be listed as links at the bottom of the screen. The screen will load normally the first time it is
opened during a session but subsequent times it will load nearly instantly.
Selecting the link at the bottom of a screen that is cached will take you back to the screen in typical
startup mode.

When you add or remove screens from screen cache, you must log out of EAM and log in
again to see the changes.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Demo 1.11: Using screen cache

This demonstration shows how to use screen cache.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 35

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

Where would a user change his or her password in EAM if single-sign on is NOT enabled?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Match each of the following user interface components with how it is used. The possible user
interface components are: Right-click options, Header, Split screen, and Toolbar.

Use User interface component

Access basic modules that display all

screens

Access basic system functions (i.e., Save,

New Record, Copy, etc.)

Perform screen-specific functions

Select listed records and view them

simultaneously on the same screen

36 Lesson 1: EAM application and navigation overview

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 2: EAM equipment management
Estimated time
8 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain how to set up, create, and manage equipment in
EAM. In this lesson, you will:
• Describe the EAM equipment module.
• Describe how to set up basic equipment class, category, and department information.
• Describe how to define equipment as an asset, position, system, and location.
• Describe how to change an equipment number.
• Discuss equipment hierarchies.
• Define closing codes.
• Describe the functionality for equipment configuration and generation.
• Define meter information.
• Describe how to set up warranties and warranty parts.
• Describe how to maintain equipment information.

Topics
• Equipment information
• Setting up initial equipment information
• Defining equipment
• Equipment hierarchies
• Defining closing codes
• Equipment configuration and generation
• Defining meter information
• Setting up warranties
• Maintaining equipment information

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 37

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Equipment information
The equipment module is one of the core components of EAM. The setup of equipment determines to a
large extent the flow of transactions and cost information in the application.
Equipment records can be associated with a number of additional information such as warranties, meters,
bill of materials, drawings, etc.
There are four types of equipment or objects used in EAM:
• Assets
• Positions
• Systems
• Locations
The definition of the equipment type is determined by the user and is dependent on the specifics of the
equipment and its function in the organization’s workflow.
The table below provides an overview of the different types of equipment and their typical application.

Equipment type Description Example

Locations Locations are the physical locations of A pumping system is located in

systems, positions, and assets. Room 104.

Systems Systems are collections of assets, If a pump stops working, you must
positions and/or other systems that turn off the entire water line to repair
work together so that when one part it.
goes down, all parts are affected.

Positions Positions are functions performed by a The pump that moves water from
general kind of asset. one tank to another is a functional
position, which can be filled by any
number of actual, physical pumps
(assets). Positions are also called
“functional positions.”

Assets Assets are the base unit of equipment An actual pump, motor, conveyor,
information and the smallest tracking vehicle, etc. is an asset.
unit for capital investments. Assets are
unique, tangible objects.

38 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Setting up initial equipment information
Initial equipment setup needs to be completed before the equipment can be used in the equipment
module.

Set up equipment classes

Equipment classes provide a way to record basic identification and break down of equipment records for
searching and reporting purposes.

Set up categories
Equipment categories provide a way to further organize and break down classes of equipment records.
Categories have additional functionality such as defining custom fields at the category level or associating
parts to a category of equipment.

Set up departments
A department (or maintenance responsibility center, MRC) is the center or area that is responsible for the
maintenance of equipment. A department coordinates the work, assigns the appropriate crew, plans the
work, and approves respective work orders. The department is one of the core pieces of information in
EAM and carries functions that go beyond the general classification of records. It can also be used to
provide additional security restrictions for work-related information for system users.

If custom attributes are created for equipment classes, those attributes roll down to the
category level and are visible in the Custom Fields section of the record.
If classes have been created for a closing code, the general closing code cannot be used.
A department cannot be deleted if it has already been used elsewhere in the system.

Exercise 2.1: Set up basic equipment information

In this exercise, you will set up basic equipment.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 39

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining equipment
An organization's assets, positions, systems, and locations are defined as equipment. Equipment must be
defined before associating parts or permits with that equipment or before setting up parent/child
relationships.
Because equipment records are central to all functionality, EAM allows you to perform a number of
functions directly from the Asset, Position, or System screens using right-click functionality.

Defining assets
Generally, assets are defined as equipment that is tangible and touchable—things like machines,
vehicles, buildings, etc. Assets typically have manufacturers and serial numbers. When defining assets,
there are a few points to consider:
• An installation parameter (ASSETASS) determines whether assets are recognized at purchase
order creation or upon receipt for parts tracked by asset.
• If the AUTOANUM installation parameter is set to “YES,” the system automatically assigns an
asset number if the equipment number field is left blank. To prevent users from entering their own
asset number, the field can be set to protected in Screen Designer.
• The commission date of an asset defaults to the date its record is created.
• Criticality cascades to work orders when the asset requires maintenance.

Defining positions
Positions (also called functional positions) are next in the hierarchy of objects. Positions combine
processes and functions. They are like homes for assets or other positions. When defining positions,
there are a few points to consider:
• The commission date of a position defaults to the date its record is created.
• If a category is entered, for which calibration data has been defined, the system copies the
calibration and test point data to the position.
• Select the WO (Work Order) Completion field to create work orders against a generalized piece
of equipment in which you want to force the specification of a different piece of equipment before
closing the work order.

The WO Completion field prevents work orders written against the associated equipment
from ever being closed.

Defining systems
A system, the next element in the hierarchical object family, assembles assets and their functional
positions. A system is a collection of assets, positions, and perhaps other systems that work together
toward common goals and purposes.
Considerations when defining systems include the following:
• The commission date of a system defaults to the date its record is created.
• If a category is entered for which calibration data has been defined, EAM copies the calibration
and test point data to the system.

40 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining locations
Locations are the top level of the equipment hierarchy and, like other equipment, can have parents and
children with many sublevels. A facility with wings, floors, levels, and rooms is an example of a parent-to-
children location.
Locations identify where the system, functional position, or asset is physically located. An equipment
entity keeps its location until it is moved; that is, it can only be in one place at one time.
Considerations when defining locations include:
• Set up parent locations before setting up child locations.
• Parent locations cannot be deleted if child locations exist.
• The LOC entity governs locations

Exercise 2.2: Define equipment

In this exercise, you will define equipment for an asset, system, and location.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Changing an equipment number

You can change the equipment code of a selected record. Only the equipment code itself is editable
although Equipment Description and Equipment Organization display when you open the Change
Equipment Number pop-up window. The equipment code can only be changed to a value that does not
currently exist in the R5OBJECTS table. All references to the old equipment number with the new
equipment number excluding eRecords and Audit Trail are updated.

Demo 2.3: Change an equipment number

This demonstration shows how to change an equipment number.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 41

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Equipment hierarchies
Equipment structure refers to the relationships between your various objects/equipment. A good
equipment structure serves the organization's needs with respect to cost accumulation, metering roll-
down, repairable spare exchange, and inspection routing.
Equipment hierarchies must be consistent with the hierarchy rules (e.g., a system cannot be the parent of
a location because locations are at the top of the hierarchy of equipment information).
Equipment types can be arranged in a structure, with systems at the top level and assets at the bottom.
Work orders can be written against any level of the structure, but most organizations generate jobs
against assets. Costs will also roll up a structure, and cost reports can be generated against a top-level
system to show work on all levels rolled into one number.
Basic rules for creating structure should be followed including:
• Systems can be parents to other systems, positions, and assets but cannot be children to
positions or assets.
• Positions can be parents to other positions or assets but can only be children to systems. Assets
are always subordinate to positions.
• Assets can be parents to other assets but only children to positions or systems.
Equipment can also have a many-to-many relationship in a hierarchy (for example, one asset linked to
two systems), but you run the risk of doubling reported work order costs when generating reports.
You can create a parallel hierarchy of locations that relate to the system-position-asset structure.
Generally, more than one equipment item is related to a single location, which simplifies your task in
building a structure. A complicated location structure that has a one-to-one relationship to all equipment
will only make your life complicated, as well as limit some functions in EAM.

Equipment structure examples

The following examples are not the only way to link equipment; but have been included to provide you
two graphic illustrations of linking equipment in structures. In smaller organizations, the structures may be
very simple and many assets may not even be placed in structures. Large organizations may have very
complex structures with many branches leading up long hierarchies to a single organizational point.
The following image is an example of a basic equipment hierarchy.

Basic hierarchy – system, position, asset

42 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
You should take time to plan out the equipment structure. A good planning method includes the following:
• Deciding what assets should be tracked, and which ones can be left out of EAM
• Organizing on paper how assets relate to systems, if at all
• Developing naming conventions for systems and assets that make logical sense to the
organization
The following image is an example of planning out equipment structure.

Equipment structure

Locations and equipment structure

Systems, positions, and assets can be associated with locations, which in EAM are simply records of
where you will find your equipment. Examples include cells on a production line, in the ceiling of a room,
or even at the top of a tower. Locations print on a work order to let a mechanic know where to locate the
equipment. Although costs roll up the equipment structure to the system level, you cannot track costs by
location using standard EAM records.
Locations can be built into structures and then associated with equipment.
Too often a tremendous amount of time and effort is put into designing location structures and this effort
may bring little return. Keep the structure simple and logical with physical or geographic placement as the
central concept.
The following image is an example of location and equipment structure.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 43

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Locations and equipment structure

Defining equipment hierarchies

A parent record must be defined before defining child records or parent/child relationships among
equipment. If a third level is added, the child becomes a parent, and the added piece of equipment is its
child.
We learned earlier in this lesson that equipment in EAM is divided into four types:
• Locations
• Systems
• Positions
• Assets
Typically, you write work orders against assets, but you can create work orders, PM schedules, and/or
maintenance plans against all types of equipment (assets, positions, systems, and locations).

Viewing equipment hierarchies

Equipment hierarchies are viewed on the Structure Details tab. The following table provides a description
of the structure attributes. Users may also view the structure on a work order in the graphical user
interface (GUI) by selecting the equipment lookup and clicking on the Structure tab

Structure attribute Description

Equipment type (A, P, S, or L) This may vary based on configuration settings. The default
followed by equipment number setting will show the equipment type, equipment number, and

44 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Structure attribute Description

and/or description and the description of the equipment followed by the organization
organization in parentheses.

Gray highlight This indicates that the record is active. Children are shown in
detail in the right pane.

"+" before record This indicates that the equipment structure folder is collapsed.
Click the "+" to display existing child records.

"-" before record This indicates that the equipment structure folder is expanded. If
the equipment has children, then they are displayed. Click the "-
" to hide child records.

"$" before record This identifies that the equipment's costs do not roll up to the
parent equipment. Use Toggle Cost Rollup to modify the
equipment record.

FLAG icon at end of record This indicates a child record.

Equipment hierarchy actions

Equipment hierarchy actions are actions that can be performed on a selected or active record. The
following table describes those actions.

Action Description

Drag and drop The Drag and drop action is used to reorganize an equipment hierarchy
structure.
• A moved child record displays below the record on which it was
dropped.
• If an equipment record is moved to a new parent, its cost and meter
roll-up data also transfers to the new parent.

Un-link The Un-link action is used to remove the equipment relationship of a

selected parent or child.

Toggle Cost Rollup The Toggle Cost Rollup action is used to roll up costs and history to a
selected parent piece of equipment.

Show Parents The Show Parents action is used to view a list of all immediate parents
defined for the selected equipment. It identifies if a child is dependent upon
a parent.

Display as Focal Point The Display as Focal Point action is used to change the focus of the
structure details to be around the selected equipment.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 45

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Action Description

Go to Selection The Go to Selection action is used to view the details of a selected record
in Record View.

Create WO The Create WO action is used to create a work order for a selected piece of
equipment in the hierarchy.

Viewing a parent record

A parent record provides a list of all immediate parents for a selected piece of equipment. Information
presented includes whether a child is dependent upon a parent. If this is the case, the Dependent check
box of the parent is selected. Only one parent can be identified as dependent for a child record. If a
location is a parent for the equipment, no parent can be identified as a dependent without removing the
direct relationship of the equipment with the location. When both the parent and child are locations, EAM
identifies the parent/child as dependent. Dependency in EAM means that the equipment will stay together
in the equipment hierarchy until they are unlinked.

Exercise 2.4: Create and maintain equipment hierarchy

In this exercise, you will first create an unlinked system. Your instructor will then demonstrate
how to create, define, maintain, and view equipment hierarchy.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

46 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining closing codes
Throughout the life cycle of maintenance and repair work, it is helpful to register certain information
related to the sources of problems that resulted in the work and the nature of the work that remedied the
problems. Such information collection over time, allows a user to perform failure analysis to disclose
formerly unknown weaknesses in business processes, system design, operational utilization, and the like
for the purpose of process improvement. EAM defines four kinds of information that, collectively,
contribute to this in-depth analysis. The information types that define this information are known as
closing codes, because typically the information becomes available at the time the work order is being
closed. These codes may be applied against any repair job for any piece of equipment. The closing codes
can be restricted to specific equipment classes, if needed to provide a more targeted analysis. EAM also
offers an optional closing code hierarchy functionality to ensure the logical grouping of codes that go
together.
The four kinds of closing codes include:
• Problem codes
• Failure codes
• Cause codes
• Action codes
Because the closing codes can be equipment-specific, they are defined as part of the equipment setup.
Typically, initial set up of the closing codes would be entered by a system administrator or other
authorized user.

Exercise 2.5: Define closing codes

In this exercise, you will set up closing codes and associate closing codes with classes.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 47

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Equipment configuration and generation
EAM uses an Equipment Generation screen to generate equipment records. The Equipment
Configuration screen is essentially a template to create assets. New records can also be created using
the Upload Utility or Import Utility.
The Equipment Configuration screen includes the following tabs:
• PM Schedules
• Maintenance Patterns
• Structure
• Calibration
• Test Points
• Safety
• Permits
• Depreciation
• Where Used
The Equipment Configuration screen includes the following fields and functions:
• Preventative Maintenance (PM) and maintenance pattern-specific fields are required for the
generation of PM and Maintenance Pattern (MP) work orders. These fields can be found on both
the Record View and the Details tabs.
• Sequence numbers that determine the equipment code for positions and systems are now unique
per organizations. For assets, they are still unique across organizations.
When warnings exist and organization option (GENEQWRN) is set YES, the system will ask for
confirmation.

Demo 2.6: Configure and generate equipment

This demonstration shows how to configure and generate equipment.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

48 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining meter information
There are two types of meters: physical and logical. A physical meter is a tangible device, such as a car
odometer, that measures a particular usage of a piece of equipment. Physical meters have limits on how
much usage you can track before the meter reaches the rollover point. Physical meters are defined in the
Meters screen.
In EAM, a logical meter is a relationship between a unit of measure and an object. This relationship is
defined to record the cumulative usage of an object throughout its operational life, regardless of how
many times a corresponding physical meter rolls over or was replaced. The cumulative usage or logical
meter reading, which can be updated from readings taken from a physical meter, always increases over
time—it never rolls over. A logical meter can only be linked to one physical meter. An example of a logical
meter is the recording of the total mileage driven by a vehicle. The logical meter may show that the
vehicle has made 225,000 miles since it was manufactured. The corresponding physical meter may have
rolled over twice (at 99,999 miles each time) and presently reads 25,000.
Logical meters may be defined for any child objects to ensure that the usage recorded against a parent
object rolls down to that child object. A child object then incurs the readings of the parent object until it is
removed from the parent. If it is then fitted to another parent, its cumulative reading (logical meter) is
carried over and subsequently updated from readings taken from its new parent.
When a specified value or reading is reached on an object, EAM can generate a work order for
preventative maintenance. For the system to know when to do this, it needs some specific information.
The physical meters do not trigger the planned preventative maintenance mechanism directly. A physical
meter must always be linked to a type of usage/unit of measure for the system to generate a work order.
Users can associate defined meter information of a logical meter with a piece of equipment. The attained
meter readings allow users to track equipment usage resulting in more effective management of
preventative maintenance. Managing equipment warranties, filing claims, as needed, and scheduling
preventative maintenance safeguard against costly equipment failures.

Exercise 2.7: Define and review meter information

In this exercise, you will define physical and logical meters, enter meter readings, and view
meter history.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 49

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Setting up warranties
EAM provides the ability to record warranties against equipment, track warranty information, and process
warranty claims. Warranty documents include supplier and/or manufacturer information for the warranty.
The duration of the warranty and the percentages indicating the warranty coverage for different material
and labor expenses are also specified.

Associate warranties with equipment

Warranty documents are associated with specific pieces of equipment. Warranty terms are defined based
on equipment usage or date.
Warranty coverage records can be associated with an asset, position, or system. One or more warranty
coverage records may be established for a piece of equipment for tracking purposes to ensure that
stipulations of the warranty are adhered to both internally and externally. The installation parameter
COVDUPAC controls whether equipment can have multiple active warranty coverages. In general, there
are two types of warranty coverage records that can be tracked for equipment: calendar-based and
usage-based.
• Calendar-based coverage records require a duration value expressed in days. The start and
expiration of this type of warranty for a given piece of equipment are expressed in terms of
calendar dates.
• Usage-based warranty coverage records require a duration value expressed in some unit of
measure other than days. The warranty's unit of measure must be defined as a logical meter for
the equipment. The start and expiration of this type of warranty for a given piece of equipment are
expressed in terms of usage.

Warranty for parts

You can warranty parts in addition to equipment.

• If using the COVDURUP installation parameter, you may modify the Duration field of
any warranty coverage record.
• If using the COVDUPAC installation parameter, equipment can only have one active
warranty coverage at any given time.
• The system automatically adjusts the Duration if the Start Date or Expiration Date is
modified.
• The system automatically populates the Expiration Date based on the Start Date and
the warranty Duration. This field may be modified as needed.
• The system automatically populates the Expiration Usage based on the Starting Usage
and the Duration UOM (unit of measure). This field may be modified as needed.
• To delete warranty coverage from equipment, select the warranty record to delete, and
then click Delete Warranty Coverage. The system deletes the record and updates the
Warranties list.

50 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 2.8: Set up equipment and parts warranties
This demonstration shows how to set up warranties for equipment and parts.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 51

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Maintaining equipment information
Transfer equipment between organizations
Occasionally there is a need to physically transfer particular equipment within facilities to accommodate
changing manufacturing needs, etc. In such instances, EAM provides users the option to perform the
transfer for the equipment record within the system. An equipment transfer assigns the equipment record
to a new organization and brings all historical work order and cost information for the equipment.
You can only transfer equipment records with a system status of Installed. The system only copies
information that is valid within the equipment record's new organization.

View and modify equipment information

Equipment related to work orders or other events can be viewed or modified through the Asset, Position,
System, or Location screen. The equipment information available for viewing includes equipment costs,
material usage, and purchase orders for the equipment.

Exercise 2.9: Maintain equipment information

In this exercise, you will you will maintain equipment information.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

52 Lesson 2: EAM equipment management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What is the importance of the equipment module?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What are three types of equipment in EAM?

1. __________________________________________________________________

2. __________________________________________________________________

3. __________________________________________________________________

4. __________________________________________________________________

What is the importance of setting up departments?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 53

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 3: Work configuration
Estimated time
3 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to define and configure work-related information. In this
lesson, you will:
• Describe work setup.
• Define trades and qualifications.
• Define employee information.
• Define shift information.
• Describe how to set up and copy a materials list.
• Define a permit.

Topics
• Work setup overview
• Defining employee information
• Defining shift information
• Reviewing material lists for work order planning
• Defining permits

54 Lesson 3: Work configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Work setup overview
Creating the work order is the first step in the work order lifecycle. It begins when a person, department,
or company identifies work the maintenance department must complete.
Work orders can be created in a number of ways:
• By a request, where a work request is created, screened, and sent to the planner
• Directly, where an authorized requester creates a work order (skipping the screening process)
• Directly, where an authorized requester creates a work order and plans it
• Directly, where a dispatcher responds to a call and dispatches workers as needed
• Automatically, where the system generates work orders in support of refurbishment of repairable
spares
• Automatically, where the system generates a preventative maintenance work order (equipment is
pre-defined along with service instructions)
Certain steps and data elements must be completed before defining work orders. Work order records rely
on work order types, equipment, departments, locations, requirement codes, employee records, trades
and shifts.
The labor component in EAM consists of the following:
• Employee
• Trades to which personnel belong
• Trade rate
• Departments to which the trades are associated
• Shifts - optional
Labor cost (which can be an estimate per hour, actual rate or burden rate) can be calculated at the
employee level or at the trade level.
Occupational types can be created to reflect the type of work that a trade can perform so that different
labor costs can be entered. They can also be created to reflect a degree of difficulty of work, for example,
apprentice vs. master, or general mechanical work vs. process logic control (PLC) work.
Departments are referenced on the Equipment screen as the group of people responsible for repairing
and maintaining certain equipment, and are also referenced on work orders when a work order is
generated for equipment. Departments are referenced at the user level to indicate to which department a
user belongs.

Defining trades
Organizations rely on a variety of highly skilled personnel to accomplish the many and diverse jobs for on-
going maintenance. These craftspeople might include electricians, carpenters, mechanics, and a host of
other specialized talents or trades. When work is completed, EAM charges the cost of employing trade
personnel (based on an hourly rate) to the appropriate job, asset, project, department, or whatever
administrative area the company determines to ensure correct cost accounting.
Based on an hourly rate, the system charges the cost of the trade back to the appropriate work order,
asset, or project, ensuring correct cost accounting. A single trade may have multiple rates based on the
type of work performed or the department associated with the trade for a specific work order. On the
Qualifications screen, you may associate qualifications with trades to establish the minimum qualifications
for an employee belonging to a trade to perform work for which the trade is selected.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 55

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
When scheduling work, you can elect to assign the work to an employee and/or a trade. When booking
hours for the work, EAM calculates the labor cost of the hours to book by first looking for an employee
rate. If no employee rates exist, EAM then checks the trade rate defined. Dates for the same trade
type/department combination cannot overlap. An install parameter 9BOOPLAN) determines whether to
get the trade and department combination from the activity of the work order of the employee record.

Defining trade rates

Rates for trades need to be defined when booking hours. EAM first checks to see if an hourly rate is
defined for the employee and if so, the hours are booked at that rate. However, if you have not defined
the trade rates for an employee, EAM assigns the hourly rate defined for the trade on the Rates tab of the
Employee screen.
To delete a rate from a trade, select the rate to delete on the Rates tab, and then click the Delete Rate
icon. EAM deletes the record and updates the Rates list.

Defining supplier trade rates

Supplier trade rates are typically defined only after trades and trade rates have first been defined.
Standard trade rates for suppliers are defined on the Supplier Rates tab of the Trade screen. You can
also define rates on the Rates tab of the Supplier screen.
To remove a supplier rate, select the rate to remove, and then click Delete Rate. EAM removes the record
and updates the Rates list.

Exercise 3.1: Define trades

In this exercise, you will define trades.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Qualifications and trades

You associate qualifications with trades to establish the minimum qualifications for an employee.
Qualifications are defined on the Qualification screen. After defining a qualification, you can associate it
with a trade. If an employee is associated with a trade for which there is a qualification, the employee
must have an active record of that qualification on his or her employee record to be scheduled for a job
requiring that trade if qualification enforcement is turned on (install parameter WOQUAL). Employee
qualifications are active if the employee has completed the necessary training course/requirements and
the training has not expired as indicated by the start date and expiration date for the qualification on the
employee's personnel record. Employees can also be temporarily disqualified for qualifications as
necessary on their employee records.
If you have associated a qualification with a trade, and you associate a trade with a work order activity,
you can only schedule employees associated with the selected trade who have the active qualifications
required for that trade to be assigned/scheduled to perform the work if qualification enforcement is
enabled. This installation parameter setting does not prevent booking labor from an unqualified employee.
Selecting the Training Record check box omits the qualification from qualification enforcement even when
enforcement is active.

56 Lesson 3: Work configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
If you delete a qualification previously associated with a trade, then the deleted trade qualification will no
longer be required for any subsequent work order activities to which the trade is assigned.
Likewise, if you add a new qualification to a trade or update an existing qualification associated with a
trade, the new/updated trade will not affect any existing work order activities to which the trade is
assigned. However, the added/updated qualification will be required for any subsequent work order
activities to which the trade is assigned, and EAM displays a message indicating the number of open
work orders for the trade.
You can select and deselect Active to temporarily activate/deactivate a qualification as necessary on the
qualification screen.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 57

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining qualifications
You define qualifications to establish a set of occupational standards and/or required job-related training
for employees, tasks, trades, and/or work order activities. After defining a qualification, associate the
qualification with employees, tasks, trades, and/or work order activities to establish your criteria for
qualification enforcement of work activities. Qualification enforcement is determined by the WOQUAL
installation parameter.
If you are using qualification enforcement, you can only assign/schedule an employee who has the
necessary qualifications to perform the work for which a qualification is required. If a qualification is
associated with a trade, task, or work order activity, the employee must have that qualification on his or
her employee record. Employee qualifications are active if the employee has completed the necessary
training course/requirements for the qualification and the qualification duration has not expired.
You can also define qualifications as training records to create a historical record of job-related training
employees receive that does not need to be tracked for qualification enforcement.
If you deselect Active for a qualification on the Record View of the qualification screen, then you can no
longer associate the qualification with any subsequent employee, tasks, trades, and/or work order
activities. However, if the deactivated qualification is already associated with any employee, tasks, trades,
and/or work order activities, the qualification will still be required for any existing employee, tasks, trades,
and/or work order activities.

EAM automatically validates whether the qualification is current based on the start date and
expiration date for the qualification. If the qualification is current, the system selects Qualified.
If the duration of the qualification has expired or is not current, the system automatically
deselects Qualified.
Selecting Temporarily Disqualified overrides the qualification expiration date, and the
qualification is no longer valid even if the qualification has not expired.

Demo 3.2: Define a qualification

This demonstration shows how to define a qualification.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

58 Lesson 3: Work configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining employee information
You define employee information to track full-time, part-time, and seasonal employees, and then define
wage rates for employees to establish a specific hourly pay rate for an employee. Also, you may record
labor availability exceptions for individual employees and for groups. You may associate qualifications
with employee codes to establish qualifications for personnel. Finally, you can associate specific
employee positions with certain functions. Correctly defined employees make scheduling possible.

Defining employee codes

An employee code is used to represent individual employees. These codes are then used to track full-
time, part-time, and seasonal personnel. You must designate a trade for an employee when you define
the employee code.
Note that the employee code is different from the user code used to log on to the system. The Employees
list would typically be larger than the User list since it could cover all personnel who perform work order
activities. The user list is limited to the actual users who have access to the system. Typically, a user
would be defined as an employee in addition to being listed as a user. These can be linked on the
Employee Screen by defining the Associated User field.

Defining wage rates for employees

Wage rates are defined for employees to establish a specific hourly pay rate for an employee. Rates for
employees can be defined based on the employee's level of experience, training, etc. Therefore,
employees belonging to a designated trade can have different pay rates than other employees belonging
to the same trade.
When scheduling work, you can assign the work to an employee and/or a trade. When booking hours for
the work, EAM calculates the labor cost of the appropriate work order, asset, or project based on the
hourly pay rate defined for the employee or the trade. Therefore, when booking hours, the labor cost for
performing work can be based on the rate defined for either the employee or the trade.
Dates for the same type of hours/department /organization combination cannot overlap. To delete a rate,
select the rate to delete on the Employee screen, Rates tab, and then click Delete Rate. EAM deletes the
record and updates the Rates list.

Recording labor availability exceptions

EAM uses labor availability records to calculate the available hours for employees. You can create
exceptions for individual employees using the Availability Exceptions tab of the Employee screen.
Labor availability exceptions can also be created for a group of employees; for example, create an
exception for all employees on Christmas day. When recording a labor availability exception for a group,
the selected employee record is not affected.

Associating qualifications with employee codes

You associate qualifications with employee codes to establish qualifications for your personnel. By
associating qualifications with an employee, you can establish the criteria to determine whether an
employee is qualified to perform work.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 59

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
After defining a qualification, you can associate qualifications with an employee's record such as training
courses for a qualification, continuing education units (CEUs), course cost, and certification/qualification
period/duration and dates.
If you are using qualification enforcement for work, an employee must have the necessary qualifications
for you to be able to schedule the employee for the work for which the qualification is required.
You can also define qualifications as training records to create records of any job-related training
employees receive that does not need to be tracked for qualification enforcement.
To remove a qualification, select the qualification to remove on the Qualification screen in List View, and
then click the Remove Qualification icon. The system removes the record and updates the Qualifications
list.

Transferring employees between organizations

The Transfers tab on the Employee screen can be used to transfer an employee from one organization to
another. Because the Employee table is keyed on employee code only, not organization, special steps
are taken to ensure orphan records are not created when the organization on the employee record is
changed.
When a transfer is initiated, EAM creates a new employee record called historic employee code. EAM
then updates every transaction that referenced the original employee with this new historic employee
code. Once completed, the original employee is no longer referenced anywhere in the system so an
organization can be changed by the system without creating orphan records. The employee’s original
code follows them to their new location when they are transferred.
If an employee will need to work at multiple organizations regularly, it is not practical to transfer the
employee each time he or she needs to perform work. Instead, create the employee record in a common
organization so that the employee can book labor against work orders in all organizations that are granted
access.

Exercise 3.3: Define employee information

In this exercise, you will define employee information.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

60 Lesson 3: Work configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining shift information
Shifts are integral for the scheduling and planning functionality of the system as well as calculating labor
availability. Shift information includes the shifts used within an organization, the days per shift, and
associating employees with the defined shifts.
Employees are defined on the Employee screen and are assigned to a specific shift. You can assign an
employee to multiple shifts, but the dates of the shifts cannot overlap.
To remove an employee from a shift, select the employee to remove on the Shift screen, Employees tab,
and then click the Remove Employee icon. The system removes the record and updates the Employees
list.
It is possible to create many shift schedules and have one person assigned to more than one shift if the
dates do not overlap.

Exercise 3.4: Define shift information

In this exercise, you will define a shift within an organization and specify the days for the
shift.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 61

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Reviewing material lists for work order planning
Certain work orders always require the same materials. A material list is a pre-defined list of parts that
may be referenced on an activity of a work order, preventative maintenance schedule, or standard work
order to minimize data entry and ensure consistent material planning for jobs.
When defining a material list, you first define the header information and then add part line items. A
material list must contain at least one part-line item. A material list code cannot have the prefix “V-” as this
prefix is reserved only for system use when creating temporary materials lists created when parts are
planned directly on a work order.
Material lists can be copied to expedite the creation of a new material list. When you copy a material list,
all the details of that list are copied into the new material list, which you can then modify as needed.
To delete a part line from a material list, select the part line to delete from the list on the Material List
screen, Parts tab, and then click the Delete Part Line icon. EAM deletes the record and updates the Parts
list.

Exercise 3.5: Set up and copy material lists

In this exercise, you will set up and copy material lists.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

62 Lesson 3: Work configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining permits
Permits are defined to link safety or authorization information to work orders. For example, you may
define a “hot” work permit regarding welding in a restricted area; a “confined space entry” permit when
workers must complete the work in an enclosed production space such as a tank or vessel; or a “lockout-
tagout” permit when the equipment involved must be completely stabilized or cut off from operational
power supplies.
Before associating a permit with a work order, the work order must first be defined. Permits are added to
work orders on the Permits tab of the Work Order screen. When a permit is added, EAM automatically
flags a new permit as Active. This setting cannot be changed while adding the permit reference to the
work order; however, you may deactivate a permit after adding it.
Permits can also be associated with equipment records and applied to all work orders for the equipment
automatically.
A permit can be deactivated through the Permits tab of the work order, but it cannot be deleted after it has
been added as a permit reference for a work order.
Specific permit instructions and comments can be added or modified on a permit on the Permit Body tab.
Comments can specify whether the comments should print with the specified record. Comments can be
formatted using the HTML Editor Toolbar.
After a comment is modified, EAM does not display a link for the original comment. To preserve all
comments, do not delete existing comment text when modifying the comment.

Demo 3.6: Define a permit and maintain permit body comments

This demonstration shows how to define a permit and maintain permit body comments.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 63

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What does the labor component in EAM consist of?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What can you associate with qualifications?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

64 Lesson 3: Work configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive
maintenance
Estimated time
3 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to discuss how to create and manage repeatable and basic
preventive maintenance work orders. In this lesson, you will:
• Describe the use of task plans.
• Describe operator checklist functionality.
• Describe the use of standard work orders.
• Describe how to define and schedule repeatable and preventive maintenance work orders.
• Describe how to generate multiple work orders using the Generate WO screen.

Topics
• Types of repeatable tasks
• Checklist types
• Defining task plan information
• Operator checklist
• Standard work orders
• Preventive maintenance work orders
• Generate work orders

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 65

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Types of repeatable tasks
In this lesson, we will cover the following types of repeatable tasks:
• Standard work order
• Preventive maintenance work order
• Operator checklist
A standard work order is a predefined set of details and activities that may be referenced on a work order
to facilitate entry of repair jobs that are performed repeatedly over time. A basic standard work order
defines a simple repair job consisting of one or more activities. Activities define what specifically needs to
get accomplished to complete the work order. A preventive maintenance work order is similar to a
standard work order; however, a preventive maintenance work order has a defined schedule
An operator checklist is helpful in associating checklist items to equipment without the need for creating a
work order. Operator checklist are discussed in detail later in this lesson.
_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

66 Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Checklist types
Infor EAM 11.4 includes the following checklist types:
• Checklist item
• Good/Poor
• Inspection
• Meter reading
• Nonconformity Check
• Nonconformity Measurement
• OK/Repair Needed
• Qualitative
• Quantitative
• Question (Yes/No)

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 67

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining task plan information
A task plan is a pre-defined set of work order activity details that may be referenced on an activity of a
work order or preventative maintenance (PM) schedule to minimize data entry and ensure consistent
planning for jobs. Details can include the cost of a task for a supplier, prices for common tasks,
instructions, checklists, estimated people required, estimated time requirement and employee
qualifications to perform the task.
An activity defines what work tasks and/or services are needed to complete the work order. The Activities
tab on the Work Order screen enables you to procure services for a work order. The Hired Labor check
box in the Activities Details section of the screen enables you to set up labor details for a work order.

Task plan instructions

Task plan instructions are entered on the Instructions tab on the Task Plan screen or via checklist on the
Checklist tab when the Active Checklist check box is enabled. When a task plan is associated with a work
order activity, the instructions print on the actual work order job card. Specific task plan instructions can
be added to specify whether the instructions should print with the specified record. You can format
comments using the HTML Editor Toolbar.
The system does not display a link for the original instruction after the instruction is modified. To preserve
all instructions, do not delete any previous instruction text when modifying instructions.

Task plan suppliers

Although multiple suppliers may be associated with a task plan, only one supplier may be the preferred
supplier for a specific task plan.
To remove a supplier, select the supplier to remove, and then click the Remove Supplier icon. EAM
removes the record and updates the Suppliers list.
If the organization of the selected task plan is common, EAM displays only those organizations to which
you have access. If the organization of the selected task plan is specific, EAM displays only the
organization of the task plan.

Task plan prices

The cost of a task plan for a supplier is defined on the Supplier screen, whereas prices for common tasks
are defined on the Prices screen, if you are using multi-organization security.
With multi-organization security, you can centrally maintain prices of task plans used across your entire
organizations.
To delete a price for a supplier, select the price to delete on the Task Plan screen, Suppliers tab, and
then click the Delete Price link. EAM deletes the record and updates the Prices list.

Task plan checklists

EAM offers the ability to create instruction checklists as part of a task plan record and display the
checklist on associated work orders. The checklist is in addition to the regular task plan instructions and is
meant to be used to capture a pre-defined set of steps that needs to be followed when performing a
specific task plan. It offers the capability of generating follow-up work orders based on findings of the
steps and other advanced functionality.

68 Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Associating qualifications with task plans
You associate qualifications with task plans to establish the minimum qualifications for an employee to
perform tasks associated with work. After defining a qualification, you can associate it with task plans.
When you select a task plan to which you have associated qualifications for a work order activity, you can
only assign or schedule an employee to perform the work order activity who has an active record of the
required qualifications for that task on his or her employee record.
When you add a new qualification to a task plan or update an existing qualification associated with a task
plan, the new or updated task plan does not affect any existing work order activities for which the task
plan is selected. However, the added/updated qualification will be required for subsequent work order
activities for which the task plan is selected.
If you delete a qualification previously associated with a task plan, then the deleted task plan qualification
will no longer be required for any subsequent work order activities for which the task plan is selected.
However, the deleted task plan qualification is still required for any existing work order activities for which
the task plan has been selected.

Enhanced planning capabilities are available.

Exercise 4.1: Define task plans

In this exercise, you will define a task plan.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 69

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Operator checklist
The operator checklist functionality in EAM is helpful in associating checklist items to equipment without
the need for creating a work order. Once an equipment and task plan are selected from the Operator
Checklist screen, the checklist items for the associated task plan can be viewed and completed. A system
administrator may also set default checklist values by class of equipment on the screen setup screen.
After the checklist operator is finished with the checklist steps, the operator checklist record can be sent
for review or completed to end the process.
The operator checklist is where the checklist items from a task plan are associated with the equipment.
The detail section at the top of the screen is where the task plan and equipment are associated with the
checklist items populating in the editable grid below it.
Once the checklist items are created, the operator checklist record can either Move to Complete or Move
to Cancel.
One of the action available on this screen includes Create Follow-up WO. If the user selects the Create
Follow-up WO from the Actions menu, EAM generates follow-up work orders for all checklist items of the
selected operator checklist record where Follow-up is selected and where Follow-up WO – Activity No is
not populated.

• The Move to Complete button on this screen can be set to a status of Unfinished,
Review, or Complete based on the setting of the field filter setup screen.
• Unfinished lets you edit the operator checklist before the review process.
• Review moves it to the Review Operator Checklist screen.
• Complete completes the process populating an End Date/Time.

In the Checklist Control section of the screen, the two check boxes Reviewed By Required and
Performed by Required mean that the checklist will not be applied against equipment until these two
fields are populated in the Operator Workbench.
The Review Operator Checklist screen is used for reviewing the operator checklist records. After
reviewing the operator checklist record, the status can be moved to Complete on this screen. If any
checklist items require follow-up before completion, the Organization option OCCLFLUP checks if there
are any checklist items that require follow-up i.e. (follow up work order not created). Depending on the
setting, it will let you complete the record (if setting is YES); or let you complete with a warning (if setting
is WARNING). If it’s set to NO, this check is not performed.
The Operator Checklist for Equipment is a read-only tab on the equipment screens which lists all the
operator checklist records with the associated task plan record related to the header. Double-clicking a
record on this tab opens the read-only Checklist Items pop-up window listing all the checklist items for the
task plan record.

Demo 4.2: Use an operator checklist

This demonstration shows how to use an operator checklist.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

70 Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Standard work orders
A standard work order is a predefined set of details and activities that may be referenced on a work order
to facilitate entry of repair jobs that are performed repeatedly over time, but not according to a definable
schedule as is the case with periodic preventive maintenance. A basic standard work order defines a
simple repair job consisting of one or more activities.
A basic standard work order consists of a header and one or more activity lines. Standard WO
Description, and Organization frame the header of any standard work order, while two additional required
fields, WO Type and Duration, and two optional fields, WO Class and Priority, house data that transfers to
any work order on which the standard work order is selected. Any activities that are defined for the
standard work order are copied to the work order as a result of selecting a standard work order.
To restrict the list of standard work orders available on a given work order to only those defined as
applicable for the equipment and/or problem indicated on the work order at the time the standard work
order selection is made, enter Equipment Class, and/or Category.
Create standard work orders, and then apply the information from standard work orders to regular work
orders.

Exercise 4.3: Define a standard work order

In this exercise, you will define a standard work order.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Demo 4.4: Generate a work order using a standard work order

This demonstration shows how to generate a work order using a standard work order.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 71

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Preventive maintenance work orders
Preventive maintenance (PM) work orders are periodic work orders for specified frequencies based on
calendar or meter readings. Preventive maintenance work orders can be applied to any of the four types
of equipment (assets, positions, systems, or locations).

PM routes and equipment within routes

A route is a list of equipment that may be associated with a work order or preventive maintenance
equipment record as an indication of the scope of work to be performed (i.e., number of repetitions).
Several pieces of equipment that are serviced together often follow a particular route and are identified by
a route code.
Routing templates apply to similar equipment requiring the same maintenance action and to equipment
that move so frequently that updating routes may be impractical. When a template is selected, EAM
generates a dynamic list of all equipment that might apply to that work order, regardless of where the
equipment is moved.

Demo 4.5: Define PM routes for equipment

This demonstration shows how to define PM routes for equipment.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

PM schedules
PM schedules generate periodic work orders for specified frequencies based on usage (meter) or
frequency (time).
The following table describes fields on the PM Schedule screen that help to enhance PM schedules.

PM release field Description

OK Window % The OK Window % field is the percent of time or meter units from the due
date or meter interval in which you are not ready to perform the PM work
order. For example, you have only seen 85% of the interval pass and no
work order should be released. In this case, the OK Window % would be
85%.

Near Window % The Near Window % field is the percent of time or meter units from the
due date or meter interval in which it would be acceptable to release a PM
work order. For example, you can go ahead and execute a PM schedule
because your equipment broke after 86% of the interval passed. In this
case, the Near Window % would be set at 86%.

Release Window % The Release Window % field releases the PM work order within a certain
percentage of days or meter units, such as “release a PM if the meter

72 Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 PM release field Description

reading is within 95% of the next due value.” In this case, the Release
Window % would be set at 95%.

PM work orders will not be automatically released if within the OK or Near Window, but instead this is a
subjective decision on your part. The Release Window is affected when PM work orders are released by
the application. Typically, the OK and Near values are back-to-back, such as 85% and 86% respectively
to prevent having a dead time interval in your planning.
In the following image, the PM work order will release on day 350 instead of day 365 and you could
manually release the PM work order as early as day 314.

PM work order 365 days example

Perform On/Perform On Day

The Perform On/Perform On Day field on the Equipment tab of the PM Schedule screen or the PM
Schedule tab of the Asset screen establishes a frequency that forces the PM due date to be an
occurrence on a weekday in the month. For example, a PM can be predetermined to be due on the first
Wednesday, the third Friday, or the last Monday of the month in which it would normally be due. The
Perform On/Perform On Day field combination may need to be revealed in screen designer. Even so, it
will only be available to use if the PM schedule type is Duplicate.

PM schedule types
The generation of PM work orders is determined by the PM type on the schedule.
There are three PM types:
• Fixed
• Variable
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 73
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 • Duplicate
Both fixed and variable are dependent on closing the preceding work order before EAM generates the
next one in the schedule. A fixed schedule is based on the date or reading when the last PM was
originally due. A variable schedule is based on the date or reading on which the last PM was completed.
Duplicate allows work orders to be generated based on the pre-defined sequence regardless of the status
of the preceding work order.

The following table describes and provides an example of each PM type.

PM type Description and example

Fixed The next PM work order is due at a fixed interval according to the
previous due date. For example, if your monthly PM was released on
March 5th, the next one will come due on April 5th. The next work order
will not be released until the previous one is marked completed.

Variable The next PM work order is due at a variable interval according to the
previous work order completion date. For example, if your monthly PM
was released on March 5th and completed on March 17th, then the next
due date will be April 17th. The next work order will not be released until
the previous one is marked completed.

Duplicate A fixed schedule recalculates the due date even if the previous work order
is still open. This type can produce duplicate PM work orders.

Nesting references
When creating PM schedules to generate periodic work orders, you can establish a “nesting reference”
between major and minor PMs to bypass a minor PM that coincides with the release of a major PM.
Although you can establish this relationship, EAM determines which PM to bypass based on the length of
the PM periods and if the associated existing major PM has a status of Released. This selection is
independent of the specified nesting tolerance. You cannot manually specify which PM is major or minor.
When bypassing a nested minor PM, the system assigns a status of Bypassed to the minor PM until the
major PM is completed. Upon completion of the major PM, the system automatically assigns the
applicable status, Completed or Rejected, to the minor PM. Additionally, if you change the status of a
released major PM to Awaiting Release, EAM also sets the status of any related bypassed minor PMs to
Awaiting Release.

A release window is not available for duplicate PM schedules.

74 Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining activities of PM schedules
Activities of PM work orders are defined similar to non-PM work orders. However, EAM uses Start and
Duration field values together with PM work orders. EAM automatically populates each activity added with
the next available line number and populates the People Required, Start, and Duration fields with a
default value of one.
If two activities have the same start date with durations of ½ day (.5) each, EAM schedules the first
entered activity to be performed in the morning and the second in the afternoon.
To delete an activity from the PM, select the activity to delete, and then click the Delete Activity icon. The
system deletes the record and updates the Activities list.

Defining equipment for PM schedules

Once all the elements needed to build an effective PM work order (namely activities and associated tasks
and material lists are in place), users can put together the schedule for generating the work order. One
thing to keep in mind—as soon as an equipment record is added on a PM schedule record and assigned
a next due date, a work order is created with a status of Awaiting Release. This really does not affect how
work orders are generated but helps explain why work order numbering will never be sequential. The
work order will stay dormant and not visible in the regular Work Order screen until it has been generated.
If monitoring equipment by runtime or cycle counts, it is possible to generate PM work orders according to
meter readings. Preventative maintenance can be scheduled by date, meter reading, or both. The work
order is generated when the scheduled date is reached, or when the meter threshold is met. If the
preventative maintenance is performed by meter, then the PM schedule type should be set to Variable.

Equipment routes
When adding equipment to PM schedules, it is possible to define equipment routes and associate them to
the equipment on the PM. Depending on the install parameters in place, the system can generate child
work orders for the equipment in the route at the time the parent equipment work order is created. The
child work orders are usually controlled through the parent work order, e.g. they close automatically when
the parent is closed. Costs are typically split evenly across all equipment and work orders of a route,
unless a specific selection is made by a user. Typically, you will schedule the route under the parent
system for all of the assets on the route. Routes are scheduled like equipment, even though the records
represent lists of equipment.
Updating the route for existing PM equipment does not affect the creation or deletion of Multiple
Equipment Child (MEC) work orders for any existing PM work orders that are pending for the PM
equipment.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 75

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Releasing PM work orders
You can release PM work orders awaiting execution in a batch by selecting the work orders to be
released, changing their work order status to Released, and updating the scheduled start date, if needed.
After EAM completes the batch release process, it retains the records that have been successfully
updated in the Release PMs list allowing you to print the released PM work orders individually or in a
batch.
If you have established a nesting reference between major and minor PMs to bypass a minor PM that
coincides with the release of a major PM, EAM bypasses the minor PM as indicated by the nesting
reference.

Exercise 4.6: Define a PM schedule

In this exercise, you will define a preventative maintenance schedule.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

76 Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Generate work orders
Create or update multiple work orders using the Generate Work Orders screen.
The Generate Work Orders form consists of two pages: the Parameters page, on which you define the
selection criteria for locating the work orders to process in the batch; and the Preview page, on which you
can preview the work orders in the batch prior to actually processing them and select run select the work
orders to process as necessary.
The Generate Options section of the Parameters page enables you to specify the manner in which the
system processes the work orders during the batch generation process. Release WOs for Fixed/Variable
PMs is selected by default, enabling the system to automatically release all PM work orders of PM Type
Fixed or Variable with a Status of Awaiting release. When you deselect Release WOs for Fixed/Variable
PMs, the system does not automatically release any fixed or variable PM work orders during the batch
generation process.
If you choose to release fixed/variable PM work orders, the system releases the fixed or variable PM work
orders based on their due dates. If you specified a dormant period for the equipment attached to the
fixed/variable PM, the system temporarily postpones the release of the fixed/variable PM if the due date
for the PM falls within the specified dormant period.
The system automatically recalculates the next due date for a fixed PM falling within a dormant period by
incrementally adding the PM period to the due date until the due date for the PM is greater than the
specified Dormant End date for the equipment.
The system recalculates the next due date for a variable PM falling within a dormant period by assigning
the new due date as the next day following the specified Dormant End date for the equipment associated
with the PM.
Note: Adding a dormant period to PM equipment does not affect any previously created or released PM
work orders.
If you choose to release duplicate PMs, the system searches for any PMs that meet the parameter
criteria. If Perform On is specified for the PM equipment record, the system automatically adjusts the
calculated Due Date based on Perform On. Within the month in which the normally calculated Due Date
falls, the system sets to the week of the month and day of the week defined by Perform On for the PM
equipment record.
The Preview page allows you to preview all of the work orders selected for processing based on the
selection parameters, enabling you to select or deselect work orders to include in the batch generation
process before you actually process the work order batch. You can select or unselect individual work
orders for processing, or you can select or unselect all work orders for processing.

Demo 4.7: Generate individual preventive maintenance work orders

This demonstration shows how to generate individual preventive maintenance work orders.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Demo 4.8: Generate a work order using the Generate WOs screen
This demonstration shows how to generate a work order using the Generate WOs screen.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 77

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What is a PM work order?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What screen allows you to change status or update multiple work orders?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

78 Lesson 4: Repeatable and preventive maintenance

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 5: Work management
Estimated time
4.5 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to create, manage, schedule, and close
work orders. In this lesson, you will:
• Discuss the work order process.
• Describe how to create, approve and reject a work request.
• Describe how to process work orders and work order activity.
• Describe how to apply transactions to work orders.
• Describe how to manage parts for work orders.
• Describe how to enter meter readings for work order equipment.
• Describe how to view and modify work orders.
• Describe how to schedule work for a work order.
• Describe how to complete and close a work order.

Topics
• Work order processes
• Creating and approving/rejecting work requests
• Processing work orders and work order activity
• Applying transactions to work orders
• Managing parts for work orders
• Entering meter readings
• Viewing and modifying work orders
• Scheduling work
• Completing and closing work orders
• Entering work orders on the Quick Entry screen

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 79

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Work order processes
We learned in an earlier lesson that work orders can be created in a number of ways. To summarize,
work orders can be created as follows.
• By request - A work request is created, approved, and sent to the planner (optional).
• Directly - An authorized requester creates a work order (skipping the approval process) and
sends it to the planner or an authorized requester creates a work order and plans it.
• Automatically - The system generates a preventative maintenance work order (equipment is pre-
defined along with service instructions).
During the planning process, a planner reviews the work, identifies the skills needed to complete the
work, and orders the materials. The planner can use the materials module to check on the availability of
parts and reserve parts needed. The purchasing module is used to order parts directly from a vendor or
procure services or rental equipment. Planning is a vital part of the work process to accurately staff and
schedule work orders.
After the planning phase, a scheduler can use EAM to calculate available and required labor, view past
due work, and reschedule work. The work is performed, hours are booked, and the work order is closed.

Work order status flow

Both standard and preventative maintenance work orders are tracked in EAM by status. Allowable actions
are determined by a work order's status. Work order statuses are defined for the security groups in the
status authorization matrix based on the actual work order processes that are implemented.
EAM comes with several preconfigured work statuses such as Work Request, Ready to Schedule, and
Complete. Other statuses based on one of the system statuses can be created and included in the status
authorization flow. For example, a status called Material Hold based on a system status of R can be
created; a status, Work Completed also based on a status of R can be used by maintenance technicians
to mark the work orders they have completed and route them to a supervisor. Because the underlying
status is R for an open work order, such records would not be considered closed until a supervisor makes
the final status change.
The status possibilities and work order flow are extremely flexible and can be configured to meet virtually
all organizational requirements. It is important to note that email notifications are generally based on
status changes and can be used to further automate and guide the work order process.

80 Lesson 5: Work management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
The following table identifies the work order status flow for standard and preventative maintenance.
Status flows and user statuses can be personalized by a system administrator.

Standard Preventative maintenance

Action → Status Action → Status

1 Work order Work Request Planned PM work Awaiting Release

submitted,
awaiting approval

2 Work order Ready to Schedule PM work order Ready to Schedule

approved generated

3 Schedule labor Scheduled Schedule labor Scheduled

4 Begin work In Progress Begin work In Progress

5 Work finished Complete Work finished Complete

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 81

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Creating and approving/rejecting work requests
Work requests are generally internal requests for maintenance work submitted by users who do not have
rights to create work orders. EAM offers a special requester license to the system at a fraction of the cost
of a regular license. Users assigned to the Requestor group have very limited access to the system and
can only create and view work requests and requisitions.
An example of a work request would be an operations or production employee who notices a problem
with a piece of equipment and submits a work request to maintenance to have it fixed.
Once a work request is created, it can be approved or rejected. To respond to a work request, you must
have the appropriate level of status change authorization.

Exercise 5.1: Create, approve, and reject work requests

In this exercise, you will create, approve, and reject work requests.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

82 Lesson 5: Work management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Processing work orders and work order activity
Work orders are used for the repair of broken equipment, modification of equipment to meet safety and
environmental standards, to indicate that the work can be performed during a normal workday, and to
record information concerning equipment problems. These work orders can either be independent or part
of a much larger project.
When creating a work order, you must define a header and at least one activity. You can also specify any
activity qualifications optional and add labor and equipment requirements and scheduling needs.
Throughout the work order work process, a work order's status and information such as work order cost
and service request details can be reviewed. When the work order has been completed, it is closed.
It is important to note that the work order activity is integral to the proper use of the work order record. All
work order transactions revolve around the activity—labor and parts scheduling, booking labor hours,
creating requisitions and purchase orders. They are always associated with a work order and one of its
activities. It is impossible to perform any work order operations, such as booking or scheduling labor
hours or issuing parts without having at least one work order activity.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 5.2: Define and create a work order and work order activity
In this exercise, you will define and create a work order and work order activity.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 83

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Applying transactions to work orders
Booking labor for work orders
Booking labor for a work order refers to recording the number of hours that employees have worked for
each work order activity. You may book labor hours before closing a work order or wait until a specified
number of days has passed after closing a work order depending on the install parameter settings.
Hours can only be booked against work orders with activities. Hours cannot be booked against work
orders with a system status of Q (Work Request) or work orders that are part of a scheduling session.
The setting of the COMDAYS installation parameter indicates the number of days you can book hours
after a work order is completed. If the number of days between the completion date of the work order and
the current system date is greater than the value specified for COMDAYS, EAM does not allow you to
book hours for a work order.
EAM automatically applies any remainder hours worked to the last equipment record on the Equipment
tab of the Work Order screen.

Booking vendor hours for work orders

Booking vendor hours for a work order means to record the number of hours that vendors work for each
work order activity. You may book vendor hours before closing work orders or wait until a specified
number of days after closing work orders.

Booking labor by employee

Booking labor by employee for a work order means to record the hours worked by an employee to
perform a work order activity.

Booking or scheduling labor for crews

The Book Labor and Schedule Labor tabs of the Work Order screen allow for the recording or scheduling
of crews. When populated and the record submitted, EAM creates a booked or scheduled labor record for
each employee associated with the crew. Either a single employee or a crew can be entered, but not
both. Detail information, including hours worked, is duplicated for each employee who is a member of the
crew.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

84 Lesson 5: Work management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.3: Add comments to a work order and book labor
In this exercise, you will add comments to a work order and book labor.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 85

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Managing parts for work orders
The Parts tab of the Work Order screen is used to add or reserve parts to work orders, import a
preplanned parts list, delete a planned part, delete a reservation, create a parts requisition, or view a list
of parts that have been planned for a work order.
You may also issue parts from a store to a work order or return unused parts from a work order back to a
store on the Part screen. If the planned source of a part is external and a direct purchase, you must
purchase the part.
A dedicated parts issue/return screen is also available, which allows storeroom users to quickly issue a
number of parts on work orders. The screen may also be used for direct parts received into a storeroom
that need to be issued on work orders. The use of the dedicated parts issue screen is discussed and
demonstrated later in this training.
To delete a planned part, select the planned part to delete, and then click the Delete Planned Part icon.
To delete a part reservation, select the part reservation to delete, and then click the Delete Reservation
icon. EAM deletes the record and updates the Parts list.

Exercise 5.4: Manage parts for work orders

In this exercise, you will manage parts for work orders.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Additional costs for work orders

The Additional Costs tab on the Work Order screen provides a method to enter dollar amounts that you
would like to add to a work order. This tab allows you to capture and record work order cost information
instead of doing a transaction. This tab is typically a workaround to using the full Infor EAM purchasing
processes.

Demo 5.5: Additional costs for work orders

This demonstration shows how to add additional costs for work orders.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

86 Lesson 5: Work management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Entering meter readings
You can view recent meter readings for equipment, and you can also add a new meter reading for
equipment on a work order.
In many cases, the meter for a piece of equipment on a work order is the child meter of a meter attached
to the parent equipment in an asset hierarchy. In such cases, the new meter reading also needs to be
entered and submitted for the parent equipment or meter so that the new reading rolls down to all target
equipment children of the parent within the asset hierarchy.
You can delete a meter reading if you find that the reading has been entered in error by clicking the
Delete Reading icon. However, you cannot modify an existing meter reading value.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 5.6: Enter meter readings for work order equipment

In this exercise, you will enter meter readings for work order equipment.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 87

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Viewing and modifying work orders
You can view or modify work order information on the same screens on which you entered the
information. After selecting a work order, you can view/modify information for that work order such as:
• Work order status
• Work order costs
• Child work orders on a parent work order
• Service request details
• Equipment custom fields from a work order
• Purchasing for work orders

Demo 5.7: View and modify work order information

This demonstration shows how to view and modify work order information.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Procuring services for work orders

EAM enables you to procure services for a service work order. To do so, click the Activities tab on the
Work Order screen. In the Activities Details section of the screen, select the check box for Hired Labor
field. This flags the work order activity as being eligible to be included in the procurement of services.
Users can initiate a purchase requisition for the services, or refer to the work order activity when creating
a service purchase order.

88 Lesson 5: Work management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Scheduling work
Scheduling a work order includes reviewing current work order schedules, calculating labor availability,
and viewing labor utilization. Work orders can also be unscheduled or rescheduled, as needed.
Work order scheduling is the simplest and fastest way to perform basic scheduling tasks within the
system without creating background scheduling sessions. It does offer some of the features from the
more advanced functions, such as labor availability but is more informal in its use.

Work order labor availability

Labor availability for a work order is calculated using the total number of hours that are available for work
during a given period. This calculation is used to schedule labor.
The Organization, Trade, and Department fields serve as filters for employees who are associated with
specific organizations, trades, and departments. Complete any combination of these fields to calculate
labor availability for all employees that match that specific combination. Leave these fields blank to
calculate labor availability for all active shifts.

Labor utilization
Labor utilization for a day is specified on the calendar by color.
The following table is an example of the colors relative to the threshold percentage.

Color Description

Light green Unscheduled (% Scheduled = 0)

Green Lightly scheduled (% Scheduled < Threshold)

Yellow Moderately Scheduled (% Scheduled >= Threshold)

Orange Full Scheduled (% Scheduled = 100)

Red Over Scheduled (% Scheduled > 100)

You may also calculate labor availability on the Record View tab of the Employee screen. EAM totals
employee exceptions for trade and department to calculate the total amount of labor hours available for a
specific timeframe.
You may only change a new status for a work order when it has a system status of R.

Infor strongly recommends that you calculate labor availabilities before scheduling work
orders in the system.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 89

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Freezing/unfreezing a schedule
A schedule can be temporarily frozen to compare the actual work done against the work scheduled.
Frozen activity schedules cannot be updated. You cannot update work orders that are part of a frozen
schedule but you can cancel the schedule to begin editing.

Exercise 5.8: Schedule work for an individual work order

In this exercise, you will schedule work for an individual work order.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Batch work order scheduling

These are two of the ways in which you can create batch work order scheduling:
• Work order daily scheduling
• Work order scheduling

When using the work order daily scheduling or work order load balancing methods, EAM
starts a session and freezes all work orders. To unfreeze the work orders, you must access
the Parameters screen and cancel the session.

Demo 5.9: Batch work order scheduling

This demonstration shows how to perform batch work order scheduling.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

90 Lesson 5: Work management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Completing and closing work orders
A work order should be completed before it can be closed. In addition to unfinished tasks, certain
installation parameters can also prevent a work order from completing. If you close a work order that is a
template work order and that work order has children attached, EAM recalculates and updates the status
of all child work orders attached. If you close the last child work order in a sequence, EAM recalculates
the requested start and end dates for all child work orders.

Closing work orders on the Quick Entry and Quick Close screen
You can quickly close completed work orders on the Quick Entry and Quick Close screen. This screen
allows you to update work order information and labor hours for the work order activities on this screen.
Once saved, EAM quickly closes the work order by automatically assigning the work order a status of
Completed with the current date as the date completed. You may be able to enter additional labor and
material information depending on the installation parameter settings.

Reopening a closed work order

Closed work orders are reopened when changes to the work order are required or when requisitions or
purchase orders related to the closed work order must be generated. If your system configuration allows
for the reopening of closed work orders, only users with the proper authorization may actually reopen the
closed work orders.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 5.10: Close a work order

In this exercise, you will close a work order.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 91

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Entering work orders on the Quick Entry and Quick
Close screen
The Quick Entry and Quick Close screen is used not only to create a work order, but also to update and
complete it. When you create a work order, EAM automatically enters a status of Ready – to
Schedule/Assign. You can insert and update activities, book labor for existing activities, issue parts to an
activity, and add or view work order comments and activity comments.

Exercise 5.11: Complete and close a work order on the Quick Entry and
Quick Close screens
In this exercise, you will complete a work order on the Quick Entry and Quick Close screen.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

92 Lesson 5: Work management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What must be selected to enable a work order activity to purchase services?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 93

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 6: Material configuration
Estimated time
4.5 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to define, configure, and manage materials.
In this lesson, you will:
• Explain how to define material configuration information.
• Describe how to create store bins.
• Describe how to manage store parts information.
• Describe how to manage manufacturer information.
• Describe how to define supplier information.
• Describe how to manage store and stock information.

Topics
• Defining material configuration information
• Creating store bins
• Managing manufacturer information
• Managing suppliers
• Managing store parts information
• Part tracked by asset

94 Lesson 6: Material configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining material configuration information
The materials management module streamlines material management that operates to support.
maintenance and repair needs while helping to reduce overall storeroom stock holdings. Each storeroom
transaction is recorded. Stock balances are adjusted constantly. Because inventory information is online,
parts are stocked that are needed when required for the work order. By knowing exactly what is in
inventory at any given time, it is possible to readily plan and schedule maintenance tasks.
The materials management module is designed to work hand-in-hand with the work management and
purchasing modules (although these modules are not required). The overall maintenance cycle tends to
be circular in nature.
Before materials can be used, basic information can first be established or configured. This information
includes commodity and tax codes, and lots, in addition to more advanced functionality like currencies
and reasons for return.

Lots
Manufacturers often produce items in volume batches called lots. Lots are a numeric or alphanumeric
method of indicating that an item is a member of a group of items that are produced at the same time.
Depending on the system settings, the system can automatically generate lot numbers when items are
received. In most cases, the ideal lot number method is used. Items requiring lot tracking receive a lot
assignment. Those items that do not need lot tracking are simply placed in the stock system as is.
Lot numbers assigned by EAM can be cross-referenced to the manufacturer's lot numbers to track
defective parts when notified by the manufacturer.
You can also manually define lot codes to identify the exact lot or batch number when stocking parts in
stores. After defining a lot, you can update the lot record as necessary. However, you cannot modify a lot
or organization for an existing lot record.

Tax codes
Tax codes are defined to be applied to materials and purchases. Tax codes represent the definition of tax
coding structure that consists of a tax rate type, a tax rate code, a value for tax rate code, a tax code, and
a value for the tax code.
Tax code records represent the combination of tax rate codes and tax code information that establish a
structure that will apply all the applicable taxes to materials and purchases based on transaction dates
and the established tax structure created within a tax code. You can create any number of tax codes to fit
any tax situation. You can also enter multiple rate codes for each tax code, as necessary.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 95

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Units of measure (UOM)
When the buyer sends out requests for quotes to suppliers, the supplier might provide a price based on a
unit of measure that is different than the purchase unit of measure. This is the quotation unit of measure,
and you then need to supply a conversion factor (the Qty per UOP) between the quotation UOM and the
purchase UOM when creating the purchase order or requisition.

You cannot delete a unit of measurement if it is being used elsewhere in the system. If you
want to hide the unit of measure in the system lookups, select Out of Service. This feature is
especially useful for discarding many of the pre-defined International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) units that you may never use.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

96 Lesson 6: Material configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Creating store bins
Stores are created in EAM to define specific locations for storing parts. When creating stores, EAM
automatically populates the price type for the store based on the install parameter PRICETYP, but you
can modify the price type for each store or part as necessary. To prevent users from overriding the
default setting, protect these fields in Screen Designer.

Store bins
To further define a part's location in a store, a part is given a bin. Bins are useful for locating and issuing
parts and for supporting physical inventory counts of part holdings. Bins are created using the Store
screen. The Out of Service option can only be selected if the bin is empty, i.e., no quantity of the part on
hand is in the bin.
To delete a bin, select the bin to delete, and then click the Delete Bin icon. EAM deletes the record and
updates the Bins list. You can only delete a bin if there are no existing part records associated with the
bin.

Exercise 6.1: Create a store and store bins

In this exercise, you will create a store and store bins.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 97

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Managing manufacturer information
EAM allows you to maintain a list of manufacturers and associate them with parts to define manufacturer
part numbers and drawing numbers. It is noteworthy that both Manufacturer Part Number and Drawing
Number are key fields in the manufacturers catalog table. Manufacturer Part Number in particular is a
very important field, available on multiple parts-associated screens and it can be used when trying to find
part records based on the manufacturer part number, instead of the “in house” part code.

Exercise 6.2: Define and associate manufacturer information

In this exercise, you will define and associate manufacturer information.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

98 Lesson 6: Material configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Managing suppliers
Large maintenance organizations deal with many suppliers. There are suppliers for parts, equipment,
services, rentals, office supplies, and more. The Supplier screen is the primary screen for setting up a
supplier network. Within this screen, you can establish a list of suppliers, create a catalog of parts
provided by specific suppliers, and list contacts for suppliers. You can also associate addresses for
suppliers.
You can also create a supplier hierarchy to establish parent/child relationships between suppliers. When
creating a supplier hierarchy, you cannot designate a supplier as a parent supplier if the supplier is
already designated as a child in a supplier hierarchy. Additionally, a supplier cannot have multiple parent
suppliers, nor can a supplier be a parent supplier to itself within a supplier hierarchy. After defining
supplier information, you can update information for both suppliers and their catalogs as necessary;
however, you cannot delete a supplier record or a record from a supplier's catalog if they have been
associated with another record within the system.

Defining suppliers
You define suppliers to create records for the suppliers in your supplier network.
Purchase Site and Services indicate whether you can purchase materials and/or services from the
supplier. If you deselect Purchase Site, you cannot select the supplier for purchase orders for materials.
Likewise, if you deselect Services, you cannot select the supplier for purchases for services or labor.
Additionally, you can specify minimum and maximum order values for the supplier to establish limits for
purchasing from this supplier. EAM prevents you from creating purchase orders or requisitions for the
supplier if you exceed the specified maximum or fail to meet a minimum order value for purchasing
materials or services.

Copying suppliers
The copy supplier feature copies a supplier, including selected details.

Exercise 6.3: Define a supplier

In this exercise, you will define a supplier.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 99

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Creating a supplier catalog
You can create a supplier catalog to establish and maintain a list of the materials provided by a supplier.
A supplier catalog allows you to do the following:
• Add services to suppliers - If you enter Purchase UOM, enter Qty. per unit of purchase to indicate
the unit of purchase in relation to the unit of measure that the supplier has defined for the service.
• Define rates for suppliers - When automatically populating Hourly Rate on any screen, EAM
populates the field based on the information entered on the Rates tab of the Supplier screen. If
you do not define a rate for a supplier, EAM populates Hourly Rate based on the information
entered on the Rates tab of the Trade screen if applicable. Dates for the same trade and rate
combination cannot overlap.
• Associate commodities with suppliers – You can define commodity codes before associating
commodities with suppliers. EAM allows you to associate multiple commodities with each
supplier.

Exercise 6.4: Create a supplier catalog

In this exercise, you will create a supplier catalog.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

100 Lesson 6: Material configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Managing store parts information
Creating and managing parts information for a business has far-reaching effects. Once you include this
information in the database, it is used frequently by buyers, storeroom employees, planners, managers,
and other individuals throughout the organization.

Creating parts
Parts are created to identify which assets, parts, and tools are entered into inventory. When creating
parts, you can classify and categorize parts, identify serialized parts, and specify tax codes, warranty
information, tracking methods, buyers, and preferred suppliers. This information facilitates the requisition
and purchasing process. Parts can also be set up as repairable spare parts known as cores in EAM.

Associating manufacturers with parts

Manufacturer records can be established and associated with part and equipment records.

Associating suppliers with parts

Suppliers’ records can be established and associated with part and equipment records.

Defining substitute parts

In EAM you have the ability to define parts that can be substituted for other parts. Parts do not have to be
substituted in a one-to-one relationship.

Changing part numbers

During the requisition and purchase order process, EAM allows users the option to purchase items that
do not exist in the master parts list by assigning a temporary part number. System-generated part
numbers begin with the character “N” and may be used to prevent delays in the purchasing process.
Changing part numbers allows users to “merge” part records and their respective transaction history. A
defined monitoring process should be put into place to prevent excess “N” parts or duplicate parts in the
system.
Another use for the part number change is in situations when part codes are based on a supplier's
catalog number for the part. It might be necessary to update part codes if a supplier’s catalog is updated
to not lose its association with the supplier catalog number. By updating the existing part code, EAM
retains the purchasing history and historical information for the part and avoids creating a new part to
associate with the updated supplier catalog numbers.

Exercise 6.5: Manage and maintain store parts information

In this exercise, you will manage and maintain store parts information.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 101

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part tracked by asset
When parts have their own maintenance needs (such as a motor on a larger piece of equipment) or when
parts need to be uniquely identified by serial number, they may be tracked as both a part and an asset by
selecting the Track by Asset check box on the part record. There is an installation parameter
(ASSETASS) that determines whether assets are recognized at purchase order creation or upon receipt
for parts tracked by asset. If transferring parts between bins, you cannot enter a transaction quantity
greater than one when issuing parts tracked by asset. If you want to issue multiple quantities of a part
tracked by asset, you must transfer the part with a transaction quantity of one until you have transferred
the total number of the part tracked by asset that you want to transfer from the sending bin to the
receiving bin.

Global search for parts

EAM offers a global search function for part records. By design, the global search options in the quick
filter on the Parts screen will search for not just the Part field, but also the values for the Supplier Catalog
Reference, Alternative Catalog References, and Manufacturer Part Number fields.

Demo 6.6: Global search for parts

This demonstration shows how to perform a global search for parts.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

102 Lesson 6: Material configuration

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What functionality does EAM have for managing store part information?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

How are bins used?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What is the importance of the store record for a part?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

How can you establish and maintain a list of the materials provided by a supplier?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 103

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 7: Materials movement
Estimated time
3 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to summarize the processes and tasks associated with the
movement of materials. In this lesson, you will:
• Discuss materials movement.
• Describe how to transfer parts.
• Describe how to issue and return parts.
• Describe how to create a requisition.
• Describe how to reserve parts.
• Describe how to view and modify materials information.
• Describe how to view parts activity.
• Describe how to complete a physical inventory.

Topics
• Materials movement overview
• Transferring parts
• Issuing and returning parts
• Viewing and modifying materials information
• Viewing parts activity
• Reviewing physical inventory
• Creating and reviewing requisitions

104 Lesson 7: Materials movement

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Materials movement overview
EAM helps you track the multitude of materials movement functions that take place in a maintenance
organization. You may transfer needed parts, issue parts to work orders, and return unused parts to their
stores. You are also able to perform physical inventories and report discrepancies.
When inventory reaches its specified reorder point, EAM generates a requisition to replenish the stock.
You then receive the parts or return parts to suppliers.
Finally, EAM provides the functionality for you to review the current value of stock in inventory, view lists
of reserved stock, and determine where parts have been used.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 105

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Transferring parts
When you transfer parts from store to store, EAM creates a stock record for the transferred part in the
receiving store. The price type defaults to the price type of the receiving store. Store-to-store transfers
also have the option of a requisition and a status to show where the items are between stores.
Transfer parts between bins to move materials within the same storeroom; the old bin location for the part
remains associated with the record after a bin move and needs to be deleted manually, if needed.

Transfer parts between bins

You cannot enter a transaction quantity greater than one when issuing parts tracked by asset. If you want
to issue multiple quantities of a part tracked by asset, you must transfer the part with a transaction
quantity of one until you have transferred the total number of the part tracked by asset that you want to
transfer from the sending bin to the receiving bin.

Quick store-to-store transfers

The Quick Store-to-Store Transfer screen allows you to transfer materials between storerooms without
having to create requisitions and formal receipt records. When transferring parts using the Quick Store-to-
Store Transfer screen, you must define a transfer header and then add as many part records as there are
parts to transfer. Before submitting your transaction, you can edit part records by selecting the part in the
Transaction Details list. EAM displays the part record in the detail section where you can edit information
related to the transfer as necessary. If a stock record does not exist in the receiving store, a new stock
record is created when the transaction is submitted. EAM’s confirmation includes the transaction number.
Since this tracking feature is not used for this type of transfer, store-to-store transfers should be reserved
for very quick material movements. Available quantities in the sending and receiving warehouses are
adjusted immediately after the system saves the transaction.

Exercise 7.1: Transfer parts

In this exercise, you will transfer parts.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

106 Lesson 7: Materials movement

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Issuing and returning parts
Parts are issued from stores for work orders, equipment, or projects. Unused parts and parts needing
repair are returned to the stores. At your discretion, you can issue parts from inventory using two
methods:
• At the work order level from the Work Order screen, Parts tab
• Through the materials module using the Issue/Return Parts screen:
Parts can be issued to five different code combinations as permitted by user group authorization as the
following table describes.

Code Description

Work Order - Activity A part can be issued to a specific activity on a work order and a single
work order can have different parts issued to different activities.

Project - Budget Although parts can be issued to a work order, which can affect an
associated project budget, parts can be issued directly to an established
budget in EAM.

Equipment Parts may be issued directly to an equipment ID.

Cost codes Parts may be expensed by issuing them to a cost code.

Employee Parts can be issued to an employee (controlled by an install parameter).

Issuing/returning parts from a stock record of a part

Parts can be issued from the stock record of a part on the Stock tab of the Part screen using the Issue
Part pop-up window. You must select either a valid combination for Work Order–Activity/Equipment or for
Work Order–Activity/Project–Budget to submit the issue/return, or you can select to make the issue/return
to an individual piece of equipment or an individual project – budget.
The majority of the time, parts are issued and returned via a work order. You can also issue and return
parts from a part's stock record.

Issue/Return Parts screen

The Issue/Return Parts screen supports the process for parts warranty. A Warranty check box, if
selected, flags the part as being under warranty. There are also options for printing return labels.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 107

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 7.2: Parts Issue/Return screen
This demonstration shows how to issue parts from the Parts Issue/Return screen.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Exercise 7.3: Issue and return parts from a part’s stock record
In this exercise, you will issue and return from a part’s stock record.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

108 Lesson 7: Materials movement

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Viewing and modifying materials information
Part information can be viewed and modified as necessary.
Price information for parts can also be updated. Revaluation of price information for parts is calculated
either at the time of the approval of a receipt for a part or at the time of the approval of an invoice for a
part, depending on your system installation parameters. Manually updating the price of a part also
changes its valuation.
You can change the default price type for a specific part and update the average, last, and standard
pricing information for a part, if your system allows it. You can also update and specify default price types
for individual parts, as necessary.
Part records can be deleted; however, you cannot delete a part record once any of the following have
occurred:
• The part has been associated with a piece of equipment.
• The part has been recorded into stock.
• The part has been used in a pick list.
• The part is referenced by a purchase requisition.
• The part has a store transaction against it.
• The part has been allocated or reserved

Viewing and modifying stock information for parts

You can view and modify stock information for parts to update the quantity of a part in stock. You can only
update the quantity on hand when modifying stock information for parts. Store, Bin, Price, and Lot are
protected fields. If you enter a new quantity on hand for the part, EAM creates an approved stock
transaction for the difference between the old quantity and the new quantity and reflects it in the parts
transaction history.

Demo 7.4: View and modify part, store, and price information
This demonstration shows how to view and modify part, store, and price information.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 109

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Viewing parts activity
Part activity information is available on the Transactions tab of the Part screen, as well as on the
Transactions tab on the Store screen. Activity information for a part includes usage, demand, active
purchase orders, requisitions, purchase order history, when/where the part has been used, stock values
for LIFO/FIFO (last in first out/first in first out), stock for stores, stock levels by store, bin stock, stock
transactions, stock in-transit, and part reservations.

110 Lesson 7: Materials movement

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Reviewing physical inventory
Physical inventory is the process that involves inventory personnel going to the storeroom and counting
the number of parts on hand. EAM does not place a freeze or a lock on the parts you include in the
physical inventory. Therefore, if you leave a physical inventory open for a period of time, you may find
that there is a discrepancy between the physical inventory on the shelves and what is in EAM because
someone could have issued parts that were part of your physical inventory process.
Once you have initiated the physical inventory and selected the Parts tab of the Physical Inventory
screen, you have two ways to print the inventory list. You can export the items on the Parts tab to
Microsoft Excel and print a spreadsheet. Or select Materials > Reports > Print Physical Inventory List and
select to print the physical inventory you initiated. You are not required to count all the parts in your list. If
the physical inventory parts on hand are the same as the expected quantity, you should still enter that
quantity so that EAM records it in the transaction history of the part. It shows that you counted it and there
was no discrepancy.
Physical inventory counts need to be approved before the system updates the quantity on hand with
values from the physical inventory count.

Demo 7.5: Complete a physical inventory

This demonstration shows how to complete a physical inventory.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 111

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Creating and reviewing requisitions
Requisitions can be generated based on low stock levels or on demand for materials. To generate a
requisition for parts that need to be purchased, you must set up a preferred supplier on the Stores tab of
the Part screen or a preferred supplier on Record View of the Part screen. If purchasing from a supplier,
catalog price is needed for the system to generate the low stock requisition. For orders replenished by a
storeroom, the part needs to have a valid part price.

Generating requisitions from low stock

EAM offers automatic requisition generation for low stock levels based on parameters set by the users.
EAM provides three stock replenishment methods:
• Min/Max
• Reorder level
• On-demand
EAM also enables you to generate requisitions for external repairs of repairable spare parts.
To generate requisitions from low stock, EAM generates a default requisition for all parts below the
acceptable level to reach the specified stock level for the parts.
To implement a stock replenishment method, you must specify a stock method for the part and enter a
minimum quantity, maximum quantity, order quantity, and/or a reorder level on the stock record,
depending on the stock method you have selected. You also must enter a preferred supplier or preferred
storeroom and appropriate part price.
When generating requisitions, EAM may generate more than one requisition. Based on the parameters
you enter on the Generate Requisitions screen, EAM may select part lines with multiple store, supplier,
and/or buyer combinations. When you click Generate, EAM generates a different requisition for each
individual store/supplier/buyer combination

Generating requisitions using the on-demand method

If you are using the on-demand method, there is no minimum quantity of the part to maintain. EAM
generates a requisition for the part when there is demand for the part (e.g., there is a reservation for the
part) but there is not enough of the part in stock to fill the reservation. If you make reservations for an
event in the distant future, EAM generates a requisition for the required materials. Infor recommends the
implementation of company policies to restrict reservation usage to a reasonable time frame to minimize
excessive inventory.
EAM uses the information you supply in Default Approver to populate Approved By on the Requisition
screen. If Auto Req. Status on the Stores screen is set to A (Approved) and you do not enter a default
approver, EAM populates Approved By on the Requisitions screen with your user ID.

112 Lesson 7: Materials movement

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 7.6: Generate a requisition
This demonstration shows how to generate a requisition.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Creating requisitions
You create requisitions on the Requisition screen to request materials or services from outside vendors. A
requisition consists of a requisition header and requisition lines. You can create a requisition for stock
items, direct materials, or services. Stock items are materials that are kept in a store and are tracked for
inventory. Direct materials are items that you requisition specifically for work orders.
The life cycle of a requisition is controlled by the requisition status. When you create a requisition, the
system assigns Unfinished as the status of the requisition.
Supplier is an optional field for the requisition because it is possible to assign the requisition lines to
purchase orders for multiple suppliers. If a supplier is selected at the requisition header, all lines would be
procured from the same supplier and the requisition can be assigned only to a purchase order for the
same supplier.
When updating a requisition's status, you can also update other information on the requisition. However,
EAM enables or protects the fields available for update based on whether or not lines have been added to
the requisition, as well as the status to and from which you are updating.
Once the requisition has been approved, it can be used to generate a purchase order (if it has a supplier
at the header level), or its lines can be assigned to appropriate purchase orders.

• Status change authorizations are set up on the Status Authorizations screen.

• In addition to having the appropriate status change authorization to change the status
of a requisition, you must also have been granted sufficient monetary approval limits on
the header level or at the line level for requisitions to approve a requisition. If the total
value of a requisition exceeds your requisition approval at either the header or the line
level, then you cannot approve the requisition.

Creating requisition headers

Requisition headers provide basic requisition information, such as description, requester, etc. When you
specify a work order and activity at the requisition header level, EAM automatically assigns the selected
work order and activity to each of the requisition lines. You can only select work orders with a status of
Released or Closed for which the date completed on the work order is earlier than the number of days set
in the REQDAYS installation parameter. For example, if the install parameter is set to 14, then parts can
only be issued up to 14 days after the work order is closed.

Adding parts to requisitions

Parts are added to requisitions after creating the requisition header. If you do not know the part number of
a part to be added to the requisition, you can search for the part using the supplier catalog reference
number or the manufacturer part description.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 113

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
EAM automatically populates some fields on the requisition line with information entered on the
requisition header. While the status of an individual requisition line is Unfinished, you can complete or
update information on the requisition line as necessary. However, EAM protects some fields that can be
automatically populated from the requisition header.
Additionally, when you requisition a part cataloged on the Part screen, EAM also retrieves information
from the part record and automatically populates basic parts fields. If you need to requisition a part you
have not yet created on the Part screen, you can create a requisition for an “N part,” allowing EAM to
create a part number starting with the letter N.
After adding all the necessary parts to the requisition, update the status of the requisition as necessary
based on your status change authorization privileges. Status change authorizations are set up on the
Status Authorizations screen.
If the part has no price in the supplier's catalog, EAM retrieves the price from the stock record of the part.
If you have entered a supplier and you also enter a new supplier catalog reference, EAM creates a new
record of the part in the supplier's catalog.
If you have entered a manufacturer and you also enter a new manufacturer part, the system creates a
new part record for the manufacturer.
If you select Direct Materials as the type for the requisition line, you must enter a value in the Work
Order–Activity field.

Adding services to requisitions

Services are added to requisitions when your organization needs to hire external labor.
It is important to note that the work order activity for which the requisition is created needs to have Hired
Labor check box selected for the activity on the Activities tab of the Work Order screen. EAM restricts the
association of a work order activity with only one requisition or purchase order line. Thus, if the work order
requires multiple requisition or purchase order lines, it will need to have an activity record for each
purchase line.
It is possible to quickly create a work order and activity on the Services tab of the Requisition screen
without having to open the Work Order screen by selecting the Create Work Order/Activity option and
creating a work order and activity for the requisition.

Copying requisitions
The Copy Requisition feature, accessed by right-clicking as compared to clicking the Copy Record icon,
copies a requisition, including selected details. This is especially helpful if you continuously order the
same items.

Exercise 7.7: Create and copy a requisition

In this exercise, you will create and copy a requisition.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

114 Lesson 7: Materials movement

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Reviewing automatic purchase order generation
If you are a buyer with the proper authorization, you can automatically generate purchase orders with
Unfinished, Ready for printing, or Approved status from existing requisitions on the Generate POs screen.
You must also have sufficient monetary approval limits for the following:
• Purchase order line or header level for the purchase order
• PO approval on the Users screen to generate or approve the purchase order
When generating automatic purchase orders, EAM may generate more than one purchase order. Based
on the search criteria you enter on the Generate PO screen, EAM may return requisition lines with
multiple store and/or supplier combinations. When you select Create PO, EAM generates a different
purchase order for each individual store/supplier combination.
This process is the natural next step in the low stock replenishment method after the requisitions have
been generated and approved.

Demo 7.8: Review automatic purchase order generation

This demonstration shows how to automatic purchase order generation.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 115

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What three methods are available for issuing parts?

1. ___________________________________________________________________

2. ____________________________________________________________________

3. ____________________________________________________________________

What criteria must be entered when using automatic requisition generation for low stock
levels?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What is required of a buyer to approve or reject a requisition?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

116 Lesson 7: Materials movement

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 8: Purchasing
Estimated time
4 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain the processes and tasks associated with
purchasing. In this lesson, you will:
• Describe how to approve or reject a requisition.
• Describe how to create and modify purchase orders.
• Describe how to receive and return parts.
• Describe how to record invoice vouchers.
• Describe how to view purchase order revision history.

Topics
• Purchasing processes
• Approving or rejecting parts requisitions
• Creating and modifying purchase orders
• Receiving services
• Receiving and returning parts
• Recording invoice vouchers
• Viewing transactions for purchase orders

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 117

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Purchasing processes
Purchasing is the link between the storeroom and actual maintenance activities. Parts must be purchased
and stocked before they can support your proactive maintenance organization. The purchasing process
begins with a person, department or organization needing something. That something can be direct
materials, stock items, or services.
The purchasing function may follow several different processes depending upon the business
organization.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

118 Lesson 8: Purchasing

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Approving or rejecting part requisitions
Before a purchase can be processed, the requisition for that purchase must be approved. Once a
requisition is created, it is submitted for authorization. You must have sufficient status change
authorization to approve or reject a requisition. In addition, you cannot approve requisitions that exceed
your requisition approval limit.
Part requisitions can be approved or rejected singularly or in multiples using the Select option. To select
all the lines at once, select the check box in the Select column header. To deselect all the lines at once,
clear the same check box.
Double-click a requisition to view its details.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 8.1: Approve/reject a part requisition

In this exercise, you will approve/reject a part requisition.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 119

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Creating and modifying purchase orders
Many times managers, supervisors, engineers, or other people in your organization have the authority to
create purchase orders without going through the requisition process. You may also be a buyer who
needs to make quick spot buys without going through requisition approvals. EAM allows you to skip the
requisition process and go directly to the purchase order.
The purchase order creation process has several steps. First, create the purchase order header and then
add line items for parts and services. At this stage, you can also adjust part charges, associate clauses,
create work orders and activities for service lines, and direct purchases, or add approved requisition lines
to the purchase orders.
The purchase order approval is subject to the monetary approval levels set for the users. The actual
purchase order approval is accomplished by changing the status in Record View to Approved.

Adding parts/services
EAM allows several default purchase order line types. The following tables describes how each default
purchase order line type is used.

Purchase type Purchase order line Use

types

Parts Stock The stock purchase order line type is used for stock
part items received to the storeroom. Users can add
items from the parts master list or create “N parts” on
the fly.

Direct materials The direct materials purchase order line type is used
for parts purchased for a specific work order/activity
(or equipment). Users can add items from the parts
master list or create “N parts” on the fly. Typically,
such items when received are automatically issued by
the system against the entity they were purchased for
and not received into inventory. An installation
parameter controls this function and can be changed
as necessary.

Services Fixed price The fixed price purchase order line type is used for
service purchase orders. An existing work order
activity (or equipment) is associated with a purchase
order line with a fixed price. The order quantity is
always one and the price is the value of the service.
The service, when received, is recorded against the
work order activity from the purchase order line.

Hours for service The hours for service purchase order line type is used
for service purchase orders as an existing work order
activity (or equipment) is associated with a purchase
order line for a set number of hours at a defined rate.

120 Lesson 8: Purchasing

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Purchase type Purchase order line Use
types

The service, when received, is recorded against the

work order activity from the purchase order line.

Contract hire The contract hire purchase order line type is used for
service purchase orders. Unlike the other two service
purchase order types, contract hire does not require
the pre-existence of a work order/activity or
equipment. The service however must be received
against a valid work order.

Extra charges/discounts
You can only apply extra charges or discounts to a saved part line with a status of Unfinished. If items are
covered under a specific contract with a supplier, EAM displays contract and discount information after
you add lines to the purchase order. Contract and discount apply only to individual orders. Install
parameter EXTCHG allows you to choose whether to include extra charges in part valuation.

Copying an existing purchase order

Purchase orders can also be created by copying an existing purchase order. The Copy PO function
copies selected details of the existing purchase order into a new purchase order and sets the status of
the new purchase order to Unfinished. In this status, modifications to the new purchase order can be
made, as needed.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 121

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 8.2: Create and modify a purchase order
In this exercise, you will create and modify a purchase order.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Demo 8.3: Create a purchase order from a requisition

This demonstration shows how to create a purchase order from a requisition.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

Demo 8.4: Copy a purchase order

This demonstration shows how to copy a purchase order.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

122 Lesson 8: Purchasing

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Receiving services
The Book PO Labor and Book Vendor Hours screens are used to receive services on a purchase order.
After booking the services, you can view the PO to record the value for the work order activity.

Exercise 8.5: Receive services on the Book PO Labor screen

In this exercise, you will receive service on the Book PO Labor screen.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Demo 8.6: Receive services on the Book Vendor Hours screen

This demonstration shows how to receive services on the Book Vendor Hours screen.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 123

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Receiving and returning parts
Parts can be received against existing purchase orders or for items purchased without a purchase order
such as credit card purchases (stock items only). EAM automatically updates the status of requisitions
and purchase orders to Complete when all lines of the requisition or purchase order are received. If there
are subsequent returns affecting the requisition or purchase order, EAM opens the affected record and
automatically changes the status accordingly.

Receiving parts against purchase orders

When receiving parts against an existing purchase order, the purchase order receipt header must first be
created so you can receive purchase orders to your location. Your receipt header can be created based
on an outstanding purchase order or for a specific supplier.
Once you create a receipt header, EAM allows you to retrieve outstanding purchase order lines on the
Active Lines tab. If you entered a purchase order on the receipt header, EAM displays all outstanding part
lines for the selected purchase order. If you entered a supplier and store on the receipt header, EAM
displays all outstanding part lines on all purchase orders for that supplier.
From the Active Lines tab, select which parts to receive and identify bin and/or lot locations in which to
receive them.
When you approve lines on a purchase order receipt, EAM moves the lines from the Active Lines tab to
the Processed Lines tab, changes the status of the receipt from Unfinished to Approved. For stock
purchases, the received parts are added to stock. For direct materials, the parts are received directly to
the work order by default, although this can be configured differently.

Viewing processed lines for purchase order receipts

You can view processed lines for purchase order receipts to see purchase order lines that have already
been approved on a purchase order receipt. Once you approve a line on a purchase order receipt, the
line cannot be used with any other purchase order receipt.

Creating non-purchase order receipts

You can create non-purchase order receipts to receive parts into a store without a purchase order to
facilitate credit card purchases or any other type of purchase made without using a purchase order.
After creating a non-purchase order receipt, you can update the receipt status as necessary based on
your status change authorization privileges. EAM enables and/or protects the fields available for update
based on the status from which you are updating the receipt.
To remove a part line, select the part line to remove, and then click Remove Part. EAM removes the
record and updates the Parts list.
The non-PO receipt function is only available for stock parts. Items received via this process cannot be
returned to a supplier. Instead, a manual stock adjustment is used to correct inventory numbers.

124 Lesson 8: Purchasing

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 8.7: Receive parts
In this exercise, you will receive parts.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

Returning parts to a supplier

Damaged or incorrect parts can be returned to the supplier after the usual receipt process has been
completed.
EAM does not allow you to return goods received via the Non-PO Receipt screen because you have no
purchase order number or requisition as a reference. To return such items, you need to arrange between
your company and your supplier and manually adjust the quantity on hand.
If you are returning parts from a store, then all received part lines are available for return. To remove a
part, select the part to remove, and then click the Remove Part icon. EAM removes the part and updates
the Parts list.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 8.8: Return parts to a supplier

In this exercise, you will return parts to a supplier.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 125

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Recording invoice vouchers
Invoice vouchers are used to verify invoices against purchase order lines and received quantities. EAM
also allows for recording credit and debit notes and non-purchase order invoice vouchers.

Creating invoice vouchers

Invoice vouchers are used to create a record of a supplier's bill and are the last step in the standard
three-way match purchasing verification process. Invoice vouchers verify that the cost of the invoice lines
matches the cost of the associated order lines within a specified range of tolerance. The process also
performs a check on the receipts, making sure that the supplier invoice is for services and parts actually
received by the customer. The range of tolerance can be based on an absolute dollar amount or on a
percentage, as defined on the Organization screen. A range of tolerance based on percentage can also
be set via install parameter MATCHTOL.
It is possible to create invoice voucher records for a single purchase order by specifying the order number
in Record View of the invoice. It is also possible to associate an invoice voucher with multiple invoices
from a supplier by leaving the purchase order blank in Record View and only specifying a supplier. EAM
would then allow users to select order lines from any approved and non-invoiced lines from that supplier.
An invoice voucher type determines the criteria for voucher approval. The following table describes the
invoice types and the associated approval.

Invoice voucher Voucher approvals

types

Invoice The invoice type is approved only after matching line items.

Debit note or credit The debit note or credit note is approved only if the original invoice
note voucher is approved and if the invoice voucher does not exceed your
approval limits.

Non-purchase order n/a

Upon approval of the invoice voucher, EAM captures the price, freezes the exchange rate if foreign
currencies are used, and updates prices.
You cannot delete an invoice voucher unless the status is Unfinished or there are no detail lines
associated with the invoice. The value in the Payment Due Date field cannot be before the value in the
Registration Date field, and the value in the Registration Date field cannot be before the value in the
Invoice Date.
Invoices that exceed the tolerance levels set up for the organization can only be approved manually by
authorized users. Inventory and service process are only updated when the invoice has been approved.

Creating invoice voucher lines from purchase order lines

You cannot create invoice voucher lines from purchase order lines unless the invoice voucher type is
Invoice and the purchase order has a status of Approved for the supplier on the invoice voucher header.

126 Lesson 8: Purchasing

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
If the invoice voucher type is debit note or credit note, only purchase order lines associated with the
original voucher are available.

Entering extra charges or discounts to invoice voucher lines

You use the Copy from PO function to copy extra charges or discounts from the purchase order line and
save them to the invoice voucher line. You can add additional extra charges or discounts either before or
after copying from the purchase order. Click Copy from PO to copy the extra charges or discounts from
the purchase order line and save them to the invoice voucher line.

Creating costs for invoice vouchers

The Extra Charges/Discounts button on the Lines tab of the Invoice Voucher screen applies costs to
specific invoice voucher lines. Discounts must be entered as negative values. The Costs tab applies costs
to the invoice voucher header. You cannot apply costs to the invoice voucher unless the status of the
header is Unfinished.
To delete a cost, select the cost to delete, and then click the Delete Cost icon. EAM deletes the record
and updates the Costs list.

Viewing invoice voucher line item information

Unlike other forms within EAM, you must first run a Dataspy to view invoice voucher line item information.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Demo 8.9: Create and book invoice vouchers

This demonstration shows how to create and book invoice vouchers.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 127

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Viewing transactions for purchase orders
Receipt and return transactions for a selected purchase order are viewable on the Purchase Order
screen, Transactions tab.
The PO Revision History screen provides you with a view of the different purchase order releases and is
useful when comparing how the revisions have changed.

Demo 8.10: View purchase order transaction and revision history

This demonstration shows how to view purchase order transaction and revision history.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

128 Lesson 8: Purchasing

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

Where can you view different purchase order releases to compare revision changes?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What status must a saved part line on a purchase order be to apply extra charges or
discounts?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What is the advantage of using the Copy PO function for purchase orders?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 129

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 9: Metrics and reporting
Estimated time
2.5 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to personalize the Start Center, use
Dataspys and run reports. In this lesson, you will:
• Define the Start Center.
• Describe how to personalize the Inbox.
• Describe how to personalize KPIs.
• Describe how to display a chart.
• Explain how to create and maintain a Dataspy.
• Describe how to run reports.

Topics
• Start Center overview
• Inbox overview
• Key Performance Indicator (KPI) overview
• Charts overview
• Managing a Dataspy
• Running reports

130 Lesson 9: Metrics and reporting

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Start Center overview
When you log in to EAM, the system displays the Start Center screen. On this screen, you can view Inbox
entries, key performance indicators (KPIs), and charts. To return to the Start Center from any screen,
click the gray down arrow on the Header and select Start Center.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 131

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Inbox overview
The Inbox displays user-defined information from different areas of the application, such as action items
for the users (e.g. overdue work orders), pending actions or activities (Inbox entries). The pending actions
or activities typically are process- or job-related and are configured by the system administrator based on
the business needs and requirements. You can hyperlink to other screens necessary to complete actions
or activities associated with Inbox entries directly from the Inbox. Inbox entries can either be user group-
specific or public, which makes them available for all users to add their Start Center. The purpose of
Inbox entries is to drive users to problem records or through a process defined in the system.
The Inbox includes three drop-down list options, or folders, and associated screens of information:
• Operations
• Maintenance
• Management
You can specify the default Inbox tab and modify the text that appears on these tabs. Depending on your
system privileges, you can also modify the Inbox by adding and/or deleting entries.

Exercise 9.1: Personalize the Inbox

In this exercise, you will personalize the Inbox.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

132 Lesson 9: Metrics and reporting

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Key Performance Indicator (KPI) overview
The Start Center displays KPIs and their scores. KPIs are user-defined parameters that measure
productivity or efficiency. EAM displays an icon and a score for each KPI on the Start Center. The Start
Center enables you to view the status of your work environment with respect to the KPIs specific to your
job, as well as your current score for each KPI. The scores for KPIs are calculated at regular intervals
based on the KPI definition.
The system administrator defines and grants access to the KPIs. KPIs can either be user group-specific
or public. Public KPIs are available to be displayed for all users. Depending on system privileges, you can
configure the Start Center to display KPIs based on your preferences. Modifying the sequence in which
KPIs are displayed is done through the Start Center. You can also delete.

Exercise 9.2: Personalize the KPIs

In this exercise, you will personalize the KPIs.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 133

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Charts overview
In addition to Inbox entries and KPIs, the Start Center displays charts based on user-defined SQL
statements. A chart is a graphical representation of a single metric measured over time, such as work
orders assigned to specific departments over the last year.

Demo 9.3: Display a chart

This demonstration shows how to how to display a chart.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

134 Lesson 9: Metrics and reporting

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Managing a Dataspy
A Dataspy is a named, pre-defined view of a list of records or a set of data. A Dataspy serves two
functions:
• It provides the layout of the List View of the screen.
• It acts as a filter, displaying records that match the parameter criteria defined in the Dataspy.
The Dataspy is the overall filter applied on a given screen. All records displayed in List View, or searches
performed using the quick search or multi-fields search function are subject to the data restrictions
imposed by the Dataspy.

Specifying Dataspy criteria

A Dataspy consists of four basic components listed in the following table. Through these components,
record-filtering criteria are specified when creating, editing, or copying a Dataspy. When the Dataspy is
applied to a list, EAM displays only the records that match the specified filter criteria in the sort order and
layout specified.
The following table provides an explanation of the Dataspy components.

Component Description Example

Filter This component Filter for all requisitions that have the status
contains the “equal to” approved, and a creation date
conditional statements “greater than” last Friday.
that make up a filter.

Sort This component Sort requisitions so that the most recently

specifies the order in created requisitions are displayed at the top
which the records of the list in descending order.
should be sorted.

Layout This component Specify that the Requisition Description

specifies the fields that column is displayed to the left of the
are displayed in the list Requisition Number column and that the
and the order in which Storeroom field is not displayed in the list.
those fields should be
displayed.

Advanced This component Narrow a query further by adding a Where

specifies an additional clause. This component can be disabled for
Where clause used for some users through security to prevent
filtering data. The corruption of existing Dataspys.
Where clause is
appended to the
Where clause
generated by the
Dataspy filter. The
Where clause will be
appended with an

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 135

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Component Description Example

“AND” statement if a
filter has been
specified.

Exercise 9.4: Manage a Dataspy

In this exercise, you will manage a Dataspy.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

136 Lesson 9: Metrics and reporting

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Running reports
You can generate reports from the menu bar. For most reports, a Parameters screen is displayed that
requires you to enter selection criteria for the report. Some reports also include fields and group/sort order
screens in which you specify the way the reports will appear (similar to how you set up a Dataspy).
Reports are available in Adobe® Acrobat® format (pdf). The Acrobat file provides a preview of the report
prior to running and enables you to print the report to your local printer. EAM does not support numbers
with more than 16 digits.

Demo 9.5: Run a report

This demonstration shows how to run a report.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 137

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What are two functions of a Dataspy?

What three items are displayed on the Start Center screen?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

138 Lesson 9: Metrics and reporting

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Lesson 10: Project management
Estimated time
4 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the main processes and functions associated
with projects. In this lesson, you will:
• Describe how to define initial project information.
• Describe how to set up a project.
• Describe how to create project work orders.
• Describe how to view project purchase orders.
• Describe how to set up fundamental procedures that represent the core functionality of EAM.

Topics
• Defining project information
• Setting up a project
• Creating project work orders
• Viewing project purchase orders
• Comprehensive EAM process

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 139

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Defining project information
Project management in EAM allows for special projects to be defined in addition to the work created in
the work management and asset management modules. Large projects can be broken down into more
manageable subprojects, and individual work orders can be assigned at each step. You can also set up
budget requirements and monitor costs for projects, including charging work orders and purchase orders
against projects. EAM displays actual costs, committed costs, and planned costs, thus eliminating
guesswork. The budgeted amount and expenditures for each subproject (budget code) are monitored and
validated against the budget amount.

Budget codes
Once initial projects are defined, they can be associated with one or several budget codes. Restrictions
can be placed on the projects, determining which users can create purchase orders for the project, as
well as the overall project approval permissions.
Approved projects and their budget codes can be associated with work orders. The work orders in turn
can be associated with purchase requisitions and purchase orders. All transactions that impact the history
and costs of a project work order are automatically rolled up to the project record, providing for an easy
and convenient overview of costs and activities.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 10.1: Create a project budget

In this exercise, you will define initial project information.
Refer to the Exercise and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the
exercise.

140 Lesson 10: Project management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Setting up a project
A budget amount needs to be included for each project. Once the project is approved, EAM saves the
budget amount. The budget amount can be updated later if the budget changes. EAM retains the original
value and stores revision information against that amount.

Parent and child projects

A parent project can have one or more child projects associated with it. The parent project with budget
codes is to be defined before defining child projects. For example, if the parent project is building a new
road, set up a project with the budget for the road construction, and then define individual steps for each
child project, such as surveys, excavation, infrastructure, paving, seal coating, and painting. Any changes
to labor and material estimates for child projects are validated against the parent project budget.

Associating pre-defined budget codes with projects

One or more pre-defined budget codes can be associated with each defined project. Once associated,
the budget amount for each code for the project needs to be defined. EAM monitors the expenditures for
parts and labor for the project and any child projects. The budgeted amount and expenditures for each
subproject is validated against the budget amount. You should regard the budget code amount values
defined on the Budgets tab as sub-budget values, in comparison with the budgets defined on the Record
View tab of the Projects screen. After a project is complete, EAM freezes all associated budget items.

Linking default budget codes with projects

Default budget codes for a project are defined on the Project Budget screen. These default codes can be
linked with a project to retrieve all budget codes for which default codes are specified on the Project
Budget screen.

Granting purchasing authorization permissions for projects

Authorization needs to be granted for individuals to create requisitions and/or purchase orders for a
specific project. If you add authorized users to a project, no other users can create requisitions and/or
purchase orders for the project.
Likewise, an individual can only approve purchase requisitions and purchase orders for the project if you
selected Approver for the user and if the user has the proper authorizations set on the Status Change
Authorizations screen. If you specify authorized users as approvers for a project, no other users can
approve requisitions and/or purchase orders for the project. You select an approver to enable a user to
approve purchase requisitions and purchase orders for the project.
If you do not add any authorized users to a project, any user with the appropriate group-level permissions
can create requisitions and purchase orders for the project.
To remove a user, select the user to remove, and then click Remove User. EAM removes the record and
updates the User Authorization list

Viewing project hierarchy

The Sub-projects tab on the Project screen provides you with a project hierarchy view of information. This
information includes all child projects and subprojects that are related to the parent project.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 141

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 When setting up a project, if any users are defined using the User Authorization tab, only
users listed there will be able to perform functions associated with the project. To leave the
project open to all users, do not specify any entries in this.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Demo 10.2: Set up a project

This demonstration shows how to set up a project.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

142 Lesson 10: Project management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Creating project work orders
You create project work orders by creating new work orders in the work management module or by
associating work orders created previously with a project.

Creating new project work orders

After defining the project and any subprojects, use the Work Order screen to create the appropriate work
orders. To link the work order to a specific project, enter a project budget on the work order.

Associating existing work orders with projects

EAM allows you to associate existing work orders with a project without having to create a new work
order as long as no direct material or service purchases have been charged against it. When a work order
is associated with a project, all costs for the work order are charged to the project.

Generating shutdown work orders

You generate shutdown work orders directly from the Project screen if the nature of your project requires
that you take equipment out of service. A shutdown work order is no different than any other work order
with the exception that you create shutdown work orders in the Project screen and specify a shutdown
identification code for the project.
After creating shutdown work orders, you can view them in List View of the Work Order screen. Newly
created shutdown work orders contain a system status of Released or the equivalent to that system
status based on your system configuration. You may only create shutdown work orders for a project once.

Viewing all work orders associated with projects

All work orders related to projects can be viewed on the Project screen.
From the Work Orders tab, work orders can be detached from the project. To remove a work order, select
the work order to be removed and select Detach WOs. EAM only detaches those work orders that have
no costs or transactions associated with them.

Demo 10.3: Create a project work order

This demonstration shows how to create a project work order.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 143

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Viewing project purchase orders
Purchase orders associated with a specific project can be viewed on the Project screen. Information in
the list includes the purchase order number, status, creation date, supplier, store, purchase order type,
total cost, and outstanding balance.
Purchase order headers are not directly associated with projects because a single purchase order may
include parts and/or services for several projects. However, an individual order line of a purchase order
can be project-specific. EAM automatically associates an order line, both for parts or services with a
project when the order line links to a work order activity that is part of a project. When a purchase order
has at least one order line associated with a project, EAM displays the purchase order in the Project list.

Demo 10.4: Review project-associated purchase orders

This demonstration shows how to review project-associated purchase orders.
Refer to the Exercises and demos section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo.

144 Lesson 10: Project management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Comprehensive EAM process
In this section, you will put into practice the EAM processing procedures from the previous lessons. You
will set up equipment, define stores, set up reorder levels, create a preventative maintenance schedule,
and perform other essential core functions of EAM. The detailed steps are in Appendix C and the values
to use in the scenario are listed in tables below.
Refer to the Scenario steps section for step-by-step instructions to perform the demo

Scenario: Perform EAM processing procedures

In this scenario, you will practice the fundamental procedures that represent the core
functionality of EAM. You are encouraged to experiment with this scenario as a means to
understand system behavior and apply the knowledge and skill you have learned in this
course. You will find the detailed steps at the end of the exercises in the back of this Training
Workbook. Use the field values provided in the tables in the scenario that are associated with
each exercise part and step.

Part 1: Create an asset and system equipment records (step 3)

Field name Value

Asset <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO ASSET>

Field to the right of the <your assigned student ID

Asset field Scenario Asset>

Department *DEFAULT/ALL
DEPARTMENTS

Part 1: Create an asset and system equipment records (step 7)

Field name Value

System <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO SYSTEM>

Unlabeled description <your assigned student ID

field Scenario System>

Department *DEFAULT/ALL
DEPARTMENTS

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 145

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 2: Link equipment records from part 1 to a hierarchy (step 2)

Field name Value

First filter under the Type

Dataspy in the
Equipment section

Second drop-down list Equals

Third drop-down list in Asset

the Equipment section

Part 3: Create a part (step 3)

Field name Value

Part <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO PART>

Unlabeled description <your assigned student ID

field Scenario Part>

UOM EA

Part 3: Create a part (step 6)

Field name Value

Supplier AMPROBE

Supplier Part Desc <your assigned student ID

Scenario Part Description>

Catalog Reference <your choice>

Gross Price 10.00

Preferred Select

146 Lesson 10: Project management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 3: Create a part (step 9)

Field name Value

Manufacturer 3M

Manufacturer Part <your choice>

Number

Primary Select

Part 4: Set up the part in an existing storeroom(step 2)

Field name Value

Store MA-1 Main Store

Average Price 10.00

Stock Method Reorder level

Reorder Level 2

Order Qty. 5

Part 5: Assign the part to a bin and enter quantity on hand (step 2)

Field name Value

Store MA-1 Main Store

Bin 1-A

Qty. on Hand 1

Part 6: Create a PM schedule for the asset you created in Part 1 (step 3)

Field name Value

PM Schedule <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO PM SCH>

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 147

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Field name Value

Unlabeled description <your assigned student ID

field Scenario PM Schedule>

Type Fixed

WO Type Preventive Maintenance

Perform Every 30
Days

Part 7: Generate a PM work order for the PM schedule you created in Part 6

Part 8: Create and approve a project

Field name Value

Project <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO PROJ>

Unlabeled description <your assigned student ID

field Scenario Project>

Coordinator BWAYNE

Current Budget 15,000

Budget Date <today’s date>

Part 9: Create a work order and associate it to your project (step 3)

Field name Value

Work order description <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO PROJECT
WORK ORDER>

Equipment <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO ASSET>

Type Breakdown

Department *Default/All Departments

148 Lesson 10: Project management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Field name Value

Project – Budget <your assigned student ID

SCENARIO PROJECT>
<your assigned student ID
SCENARIO Budget

Part 9: Create a work order and associate it to your project (step 7)

Field name Value

Trade BOIL

People Required 1

Estimated Hours 1

Part 9: Create a work order and associate it to your project (step 9)

Field name Value

Trade ME - Mechanical

People Required 1

Estimated Hours 1

Hired Labor Select

Part 10: Schedule an employee for your work activity (step 3)

Field name Value

Activity Boiler Tech

Employee CKENT

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 149

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 11: Issue the part you created in Part 3 to work order activity you created in Part 9 (step 2)

Field name Value

Part <your scenario part>

Activity Boiler Tech

Quantity 1

Part 12: Book labor hours for the work order activity you created in Part 9

Part 13: Create and approve purchase order (step 3)

Field name Value

Purchase Order <your assigned student ID

Scenario Purchase Order>

Store MA-1 Main Store

Originator BALLEN

Due Date <five days from today’s

date>

Supplier AMPROBE

Currency USD

Exchange Rate 1

Part 13: Create and approve purchase order (step 7)

Field name Value

Part <your scenario part>

Type Stock items

Purchase Qty 5
EA

150 Lesson 10: Project management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Field name Value

Requested Qty 5

Price 10.00

Status Unfinished

Qty per UOP 1

Part 13: Create and approve purchase order (step 11)

Note: You will create and approve a purchase order for the stock using the part you created in
part 3 for the work order created in part 9; direct materials creating an N part for the work order
activity you created in part 9; and service (hours from service) for the second work order activity
you created in part 9.

Field name Value

Part <your assigned student ID

Direct Materials Scenario>

Purchase Qty. (UOP) 5

Requested Qty. (UOM) 5

Price (UOP) 10.00

Work Order-Activity <your scenario project

work order>
BOIL

Part 13: Create and approve purchase order (step 14)

Field name Value

Type Hours from service

Work Order-Activity <your scenario project

work order>
ME

Hours Requested 1

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 151

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Field name Value

Price 50.00

Part 14: Receive materials for the PO you created

Part 15: Book PO labor hours for the PO you created

Part 16: Close work orders you created in parts 7 and 9

Part 17: View work order cost, project cost, and equipment cost and events

Part 18: View equipment history

152 Lesson 10: Project management

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Check your understanding

What happens if a budget amount for a project changes?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What is the result of not adding authorized users to a project?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

You have set up child projects for a parent project. What is the result if any of the budget
costs for those child projects change?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 153

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Appendices
The following are included in this section:
• Appendix A: User accounts for multi-tenant environment
• Appendix B – User accounts for SDL environment

154 Appendices
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Appendix A: User accounts for multi-tenant
environment
Your instructor will assign you a student user ID from the table listed below to use for class exercises.
Note: If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, refer to the Training Desktop Login
Instructions on the Lab On Demand page.

EAM Foundation
v11.4/01_9031810_IEN0001_EEN

Training ID User Password

Environment
entry point (VM)

EAM MT Desktop All Infor Infor123!

Application ID User name Password

Instructor login
(for course
demos):
User IN01 in01@infor- Varies
EAM edu.com

Student logins (for

course exercises):
EAM User st01@infor- Varies
ST01 edu.com

User st02@infor- Varies

ST02 edu.com

User st03@infor- Varies

ST03 edu.com

User st04@infor- Varies

ST04 edu.com

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 155

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 User st05@infor- Varies
ST05 edu.com

User st06@infor- Varies

ST06 edu.com

User st07@infor- Varies

ST07 edu.com

User st08@infor- Varies

ST08 edu.com

User st09@infor- Varies

ST09 edu.com

User st10@infor- Varies

ST10 edu.com

User st11@infor- Varies

ST11 edu.com

User st12@infor- Varies

ST12 edu.com

User st13@infor- Varies

ST13 edu.com

156 Appendices
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 User st14@infor- Varies
ST14 edu.com

User st15@infor- Varies

ST15 edu.com

User st16@infor- Varies

ST16 edu.com

User st17@infor- Varies

ST17 edu.com

User st18@infor- Varies

ST18 edu.com

User st19@infor- Varies

ST19 edu.com

User st20@infor- Varies

ST20 edu.com

User st21@infor- Varies

ST21 edu.com

User st22@infor- Varies

ST22 edu.com

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 157

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 User st23@infor- Varies
ST23 edu.com

User st24@infor- Varies

ST24 edu.com

Use the table below to record your student-defined information used during class.

Item Details

158 Appendices
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Appendix B: User accounts for SDL environment
If you are an SDL student, select a user ID from the table listed below to use for class exercises.
Note: If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, you may also refer to the Training Desktop
Login Instructions on the Lab On Demand page.

EAM Foundation v11.4-

01_9031810_CEN0001_EEN

Training ID User Password

Environment
entry point (VM)

EAM 11.4 All Infor Infor123

Desktop

Application ID User name Password

Instructor login
(for course
demos):
User [email protected] !nfor08
Infor Ming.le IN01

Student logins
(for course
exercises):
User [email protected] !nfor08
Infor Ming.le ST01

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST02

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST03

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST04

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 159

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 User [email protected] !nfor08
ST05

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST06

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST07

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST08

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST09

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST10

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST11

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST12

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST13

160 Appendices
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 User [email protected] !nfor08
ST14

User [email protected]
ST15 !nfor08

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST16

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST17

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST18

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST19

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST20

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST21

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST22

[email protected] !nfor08

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 161

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 User
ST23

User [email protected] !nfor08

ST24

Use the table below to record your student-defined information used during class.

Item Details

162 Appendices
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Exercises and demos
This section provides step-by-step guidance in completing the exercises and demos used throughout the
course.
• If you are taking this course as classroom or virtual instructor-led training, observe as your
instructor first demonstrates each exercise or demo.
• If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, perform the steps for each exercise or
demo.
These instructions are intended to perform tasks within an Infor training environment.

If you are using these instructions to practice tasks outside of the designated training
environment (such as on your own system), please note that the steps provided in this guide
may not work exactly as written.

Before you begin

Verify you are logged in to the Training Desktop. If not, log in following instructions provided
by your course instructor.
Note: If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, follow the instructions on the
course Lab On Demand screen.

After reading this page, scroll down to begin the first exercise.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 163

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 1.1: Log in to EAM
In this exercise, you will log in to EAM.

Note: If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, follow the log in instructions
provided to you and do not perform Exercise 1.1.

Exercise steps
1. Double-click the Infor Ming.le desktop shortcut. Note: The icon may be labeled Infor Ming.le. A
Sign In screen opens.
2. Type <your assigned user ID> in the User name field. You may need to press Backspace to
remove inforuser. Note: Refer to Appendix A: User accounts to locate your assigned user ID
and password. If you are attending Instructor-Led Training, Infor will provide you with log in
credentials.
3. Type <your password> in the Password field.
4. Click Sign In. The Welcome to Infor Ming.le screen opens.
5. Click the App Menu at the top left of the window next to the Infor icon. A drop-down menu opens
with icons.
6. Click Assets. EAM opens to the Start Center screen.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

164 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.2: Manage a personal account
This demonstration shows how to manage a personal account.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center for your user account. If not,
refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Click the gray down arrow (i.e., User Menu) in the Header menu. A list of options displays.
2. Select My Account in the list of options. The My Account screen opens.
3. Click the drop-down arrow in the Success Msg. Timeout field. A list of options displays.
4. Select 2 Seconds from the list of options. Success messages will display for two seconds.
5. Type <a new email address> in the E-mail field. Note: You can use any email address you want.
6. Select English from the Language drop-down list.
7. Click the Save Record icon. A confirmation message displays at the top of the My Account
screen.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 165

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.3: Navigate the user interface
This demonstration shows how to navigate the user interface.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center for your user account. If not,
refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. View the components of the Header as follows:
• Work
• Materials
• Equipment
• Purchasing
• Operations
• Administration
2. Click the Equipment drop-down menu. A list of options displays.
3. Select Assets in the list of options. The Asset screen opens.
4. View the components of the toolbar on the Asset screen.
5. Select <any asset record> in the list on the left side of the screen.
6. Click each tab to view screen options.
7. Click the Record View tab.
8. Click More. A list of additional tab options displays.
9. Click the Record View tab. Details about the record display.
10. Right-click any blank space in the Asset record. A list of right-click options displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

166 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.4: Display List View versus Record View (Split Screen)
This demonstration shows how to display List View, Record View, and Split Screen.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens. By default, it displays in Split View.
2. Click the Expand Left icon. This displays the screen in Record View mode. The image below
identifies the Expand Left icon.

3. Click the Expand Right icon. This displays the screen in List View mode. The image below
identifies the Expand Right icon.

4. Click the Split View icon. This displays the screen in Split View mode. The image below
identifies the Split View icon.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 167

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 1.5: Process records in a list using filters, sorting, resizing,
and exporting
In this exercise, you will do the following:
▪ Select rows in a list
▪ Define quick filters on a screen and a lookup
▪ Soft records
▪ Arrange and resize columns in a list and save the new layout
▪ Copy records
▪ Export records
▪ Display a total record count

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Display rows in a list

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens. The List View for parts displays on the left and
the Record View of the selected part displays on the right in Split-Screen mode.
2. Click the Expand Right icon. The Part screen displays in List View.

Part 2: Select rows in a list

1. Press and hold the Ctrl key on one of the rows. A row is highlighted.
2. Click another non-consecutive row while still holding the Ctrl key down. Another row is
highlighted.
3. Click another non-consecutive row. All rows you selected are highlighted.
4. Press and hold the Shift key on another non-consecutive row. All rows between the two selected
rows are highlighted.

Part 3: Define quick filters on a screen and a lookup

1. Click the (A) drop-down list under Part, before the Description column header. A list of options
displays.
2. Click Contains in the list of options.
3. Click inside the Description field.
4. Type Valve.
5. Press Enter. The Parts list is filtered and displays just those parts that meet your filter criteria (in
this case, parts with valve in their description display).
6. Click the Clear Filter icon on the bottom right of the screen. Your filter criteria are cleared. The
image below identifies the Clear Filter icon.

168 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 4: Sort records
1. Click directly on the word Part in the column header. The arrow in the column points up. The list
is displayed in ascending order.
2. Click directly on the word Part in the column header again. The arrow in the column points down.
The list is displayed in descending order

Part 5: Arrange and resize columns

1. Click and hold the mouse on the Description column header.
2. Drag Description in front of the Category column header. A green circle around a check mark
displays indicating you can safely drop the item into its new position.
3. Click and hold the line between <any two> column headers. A double-arrow cursor displays.
4. Drag the double-arrow cursor to the left to shorten the width of the Class column.

Part 6: Copy a record

1. Click the Split-View icon. List View displays in the left frame and Record View displays in the
right frame.
2. Select 100100CHANNEL in List View. The Record View tab is selected.
3. Click the Copy Record icon. A copy of the record displays.
4. Complete the fields as needed to customize this record. Note: You must change the part field.
Two parts with the same name cannot exist in EAM.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays. A new record is created based on the
original from which it was copied.

Part 7: Export records

1. Click the Expand Right icon. Parts display in List View.
2. Click the Export icon on the bottom right of the screen. The image below identifies the Export
icon. Sheet 1.xls displays in the bottom-left corner of the screen.

3. Double-click Sheet 1.xls. An Excel spreadsheet opens populated with values from the EAM
record you selected.
4. Select File > Exit to quit Excel. It is not necessary to save the Excel spreadsheet. EAM displays.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 169

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 8: Display a total record count
5. Click the Show Total Record Count icon on the bottom left of the screen. A pop-up window
opens indicating the total number of part records. The image below identifies the Show Total
Count Record icon.

6. Click OK.
7. Stop the exercise here.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

170 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.6: Enter and update fields from List View
This demonstration shows how to enter and update fields.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Select <a part of your choice> that you want to update from List View. The row is highlighted
and displays the record details in Record View on the right in Spilt View mode.
3. Click the Expand Right icon. The list of records displays in List View.
4. Right-click <the selected record>. The option Update Field displays.
5. Select Update Field. The Update Field pop-up window opens.
6. Click the Field drop-down list. A list of field values displays.
7. Select Tracking Method as a field to update.
8. Select Stock in the New Value drop-down list.
9. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays.
10. Click Close.
11. Click the Split View icon. The record displays in Record View in the right-hand frame and List
View in the left-hand frame.
12. Confirm that Tracking Method with the field value Stock displays in Record View on the right.
13. Click the Expand Right icon. The list of records displays in List View.
14. Select <the same record from earlier in this exercise> in List View to update a second field.
15. Right-click <the selected record>. The Update Field option displays.
16. Select Update Field. The Update Field pop-up window opens.
17. Select Out of Service in the Field drop-down list.
18. Select the Set Value to Null check box.
19. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays.
20. Click Close

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 171

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.7: Associate documents to a record
This demonstration shows how to associate documents to a record.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Click <any record>.
3. Select More > Documents. Documents is added as a tab and is selected.
4. Click Create/Upload Document. The Create/Upload Document pop-up window opens.
Note: You must click directly on the text Create/Upload Document; otherwise, the Link
Document pop-up window opens.
5. Type <your assigned student ID> in the Document Code field.
6. Type <your assigned student ID> Start-up pdf in the unlabeled description field.
7. Click Browse at the end of the File Name field.
8. Click Desktop in the left panel. The Desktop contents display in the right panel.
9. Double-click EAM Course Files folder. The folder opens with EAM 11.4 Foundation Course
folder as the contents.
10. Double-click EAM 11.4 Foundation Course folder. The folder opens with Infor EAM 11.4 Start
Center.pdf as the contents.
11. Select Infor EAM 11.4 Start Center.pdf.
12. Click Open. You return to the Create/Upload Document pop-up window.
13. Select <today’s date> in the Effective Date field.
14. Select <a year from today’s date> in the Expiration Date field.
15. Type <your assigned student ID> Start-up doc in the Title field.
16. Click Submit. The document is added to the hierarchy.
17. Click the document <your assigned student ID> Start-up pdf in the hierarchy. The Link
Document pop-up window opens.
18. Click View Document in the Link Document pop-up window. The Infor EAM 11.4 Start
Center.pdf opens.
19. Click the X in the upper right of the pdf to close the document.
20. Click Save. The document is associated with the record you selected.

172 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 173

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.8: Manage comments
This demonstration shows how to manage comments.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Click <any record of your choice> in List View.
3. Click the Comments tab.
4. Click the Add Comment icon. The Add/Edit Comments pop-up window opens.
5. Type <any comment> in the message box.
6. Verify Print with Document is selected. This indicates that comments print on the associated
report.
7. Click Save. The comment is associated with the record you selected. <The comment> with a
date stamp and user ID displays.
8. Double-click <your comment>.
9. Type <another comment> in the message box below <your original comment>.
10. Click Save. The comment is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

174 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.9: Associate items to a record
This demonstration shows how to associate items to a record.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Associate addresses to a record

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Select <an asset of your choice> in List View.
3. Select More > Addresses. Addresses displays as a tab.
4. Select <any address type> in the Address Type drop-down list in the Address Details section of
the screen.
5. Type <any address of your choice> in the Full Address field.
6. Click the Submit icon. <The address you created> displays in the Addresses list.

Part 2: Delete an address from a record

1. Select <the address you just created>.
2. Click the Delete address icon above the Address Details section of the screen. The address is
deleted from the Addresses list.

Part 3: Associate parts to a record (bill of material)

1. Select More > Parts Associated. You need to click the down arrow to scroll through the list.
Parts Associated is added as a tab.
2. Click the Lookup icon in the Part field in the Part Details section of the screen. The Parts pop-
up window opens.
3. Select part #10012 in the list.
4. Click OK.
5. Type <a quantity of your choice> in the Quantity field.
6. Click Submit. The part is associated to the asset in the Parts Associated list.

Part 4: View store room availability of the part

1. Select <your associated part> in the list at the top section of the screen. Details of the part
populate the fields in the lower section of the screen.
2. Select Actions > Stock Info in the Part Details section of the screen. The Stock Info pop-up
window opens showing stock availability.
3. Click Close.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 175

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

176 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 1.10: Associate items to a record and manage comments
In this exercise, you will associate items to a record and manage comments.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Update fields

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Select <any record of your choice> you want to update from List View. The row is highlighted
and displays the record details in Record View on the right in Spilt View mode.
3. Click the Expand Right icon. The list of records displays in List View.
4. Right-click <your selected record>. Update Field displays.
5. Select Update Field. The Update Field pop-up window opens.
6. Click the Field drop-down list. A list of field values displays.
7. Select Tracking Method as a field to update.
8. Select Stock in the New Value drop-down list.
9. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays.
10. Click Close.
11. Click the Split View icon. The record displays in Record View in the right-hand frame and List
View in the left-hand frame.
12. Confirm that Tracking Method with the field value Stock displays in Record View.
13. Click the Expand Right icon. The list of records displays in List View.
14. Select <the same record from earlier in this exercise> in List View to update a second field.
15. Right-click <the selected record>. The Update Field option displays.
16. Select Update Field. The Update Field pop-up window opens.
17. Select Out of Service from the Field drop-down list.
18. Select the Set Value to Null check box.
19. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays.
20. Click Close.

Part 2: Use toolbar icons

1. Select the <same record from earlier in this exercise> in List View. The row is highlighted.
2. Perform one of the following options.
• Click a corresponding action icon (i.e., New Record, Next Record, Previous Record, Copy
Record, Help, or Screen Designer) to perform an action on the selected rows.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 177

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 • Double-click <the row> to view the details of the record. The record opens in Record View.

Part 3: Associate documents to a record

1. Click the Split View icon.
2. Select <a record of your choice> in List View.
3. Click More. A list of options displays. These options are tabs you can select to appear on the
screen.
4. Select Documents. The Documents tab is added.
5. Click the Create/Upload Document text. The Create/Upload Document pop-up window opens.
6. Type <your assigned student ID> in the Document Code field.
7. Type <your assigned student ID> Start-up pdf in the unlabeled description field.
8. Click Browse at the end of the File Name field.
9. Double-click EAM Course Files folder. The folder opens with EAM 11.4 Foundation Course
folder as the contents.
10. Double-click EAM 11.4 Foundation Course folder. The folder opens with Infor EAM 11.4 Start
Center.pdf as the contents.
11. Select Infor EAM 11.4 Start Center.pdf.
12. Click Open. You return to the Create/Upload Document pop-up window.
13. Select <today’s date> in the Effective Date field.
14. Select <a year from today’s date> in the Expiration Date field.
15. Type <your assigned student ID> Start-up doc in the Title field.
16. Click Submit. The document is added to the hierarchy.
17. Click the document <your assigned student ID> Start-up pdf in the hierarchy. The Link
Document pop-up window opens.
18. Click View Document in the Link Document pop-up window. The Start Center v11.0 Technical
Whitepaper opens.
19. Click the X in the upper right of the pdf to close the document.
20. Review the following available options on the Link Document pop-up window.

Option Check this option if…

View Document You want to review the document.

Save You want to save the document after making changes to the
record.

Cancel You want to cancel the action.

Remove Document Link You want to disassociate the document.

178 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Option Check this option if…

Upload Document You want to send the document to another entity.

21. Click Save. A confirmation message displays.

Part 4: Add comments to a record

1. Click the Comments tab.
2. Click the Add Comment icon. The Add/Edit Comments pop-up window opens.
3. Type <any comment> in the message box.
4. Select the Print with document check box, if needed. This indicates that the comments print on
the associated report.
5. Click Save. The comment is associated with the record you selected and displays with a date
stamp and user ID.

Part 5: Associate parts to an equipment (bill of material)

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Select <an asset of your choice> in List View.
3. Select More > Parts Associated. Parts Associated is added as tab. Note: You may need to
click the down arrow to find Parts Associated.)
4. Click the Part field look-up icon in the Part Details section of the screen. The Parts pop-up
window opens.
5. Select <a part of your choice> in the list.
6. Click OK.
7. Type <a quantity of your choice> in the Quantity field.
8. Click Submit. The part is associated to the asset in the Parts Associated list.

Part 6: View storeroom availability of a part

1. Select <your associated part>.
2. Select Actions > Stock Info in the Part Details section of the screen. The Stock Info pop-up
window opens showing stock availability.
3. Click Close.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 179

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 1.11: Using screen cache
This demonstration shows how to use screen cache.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Add a screen to cache

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Select the All Work Orders Dataspy from the drop-down list in the left side of the search bar.
3. Press F8 to run the Dataspy.
4. Select <a work order of your choice>. The record details display in Record View.
5. Right-click any blank area of the Work Order screen in Record View. A list of options displays.
6. Select Add to Screen Cache in the list of options.
7. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
8. Select <an asset of your choice>. The record details display in Record View.
9. Right-click any blank area of the Asset screen. A list of options displays.
10. Select Add to Screen Cache in the list of options.
11. Click the User Menu in the Header menu.
12. Select Logout or Sign out.
13. Click X on the Ming.le tab to close Infor Ming.le.
14. Log in to EAM following the steps in Exercise 1.1. An Assets link and Work Orders link display
at the bottom of the screen.
15. Double-click <one of the links>. The screen you cached op.

Part 2: Remove a screen from cache

1. Right-click <any blank> area of the screen you accessed in part 1. A list of options displays.
2. Select Remove from Screen Cache in the list of options.
3. Log out of EAM following the steps in part 1.
4. Log in to EAM following the steps in Exercise 1.1. The screen is removed from the cached list.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

180 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 2.1: Set up basic equipment information
In this exercise, you will set up basic equipment information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Set up equipment class

1. Select Administration > Setup > Classes. The Classes screen opens.
2. Click the New Record icon. A blank Classes screen opens.
3. Click the Lookup icon in the Entity field. The Classes pop-up window opens.
4. Select OBJ-Equipment in the list of classes.
5. Click OK. OBJ populates the Entity field.
6. Type <your assigned student ID>PUMP in the Class field. This is the identifier.
7. Type <your assigned student ID> Pump in the Description field.
8. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Set up equipment categories

1. Select Equipment > Setup > Categories. The Category screen opens.
2. Click New Record. A blank Category screen opens.
3. Type <your assigned student ID>CIRC PUMP in the Category field. This is the identifier.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Circulation Pump in the unlabeled description field. This field is
located to the right of the Category field.
5. Select <your assigned student ID>PUMP from the Equipment Class field. <Your circulation
pump> is valid for the PUMP class.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 181

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 3: Set up a department
1. Select Equipment > Setup > Departments. The Department screen opens.
2. Click New Record. A blank Department screen opens.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> DPTCODE in the Department field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Department Code in the description of the department. This
field is located to the right of the Department field.
5. Select ANDERSON - Dick Anderson from the Default Supervisor field.
6. Select MA-1 Main Store in the Default Store field.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

182 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 2.2: Define equipment
In this exercise, you will define equipment for an asset, system, and location.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define an asset as equipment

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Asset screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> ASSET 1 in the Asset field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> ASSET 1 in the unlabeled Asset description field.
5. Select ELEC - Electrical in the Department field.
6. Select Installed in the Status field, if needed.
7. Select AIRCOMP - Air Compressor from the Class field.
8. Select the Production check box. This identifies the asset as being used in production.
9. Select the Safety check box. This identifies that safety precautions need to be observed when
working with this asset.
10. Verify that <today’s date> displays in the Commission Date field.
Note: This date can be changed by clicking the Calendar icon and selecting the date the asset
was put into service.
11. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define a system as equipment

1. Select Equipment > Systems. The System screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The System screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> SYSTEM 1 in the System field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> System 1 in the unlabeled System description field.
5. Select ELEC - Electrical in the Department field.
6. Select Installed in the Status field, if needed.
7. Select the Production check box.
8. Verify that <today’s date> displays in the Commission Date field.
9. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 3: Define location as equipment

1. Select Equipment > Setup > Locations. The Location screen opens.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 183

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 2. Click New Record. The Location screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> LOCATION in the Location field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> LOCATION in the field to the unlabeled Location description
field.
5. Select ELEC - Electrical in the Department field.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

184 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 2.3: Change an equipment number
This demonstration shows how to change an equipment number.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Type <your student ID> in the List View filter field.
3. Press F8. Search results are filtered.
4. Select <the asset you created in Exercise 2.2>. The asset details display in Record View.
5. Right-click a blank space in the Asset screen. A list of right-click options displays.
6. Select Change Equipment Number in the list of options. The Change Of Equipment number
pop-up window opens.
7. Type <your assigned student ID> NEW EQUIPMENT in the New Equipment field.
8. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays. The database is updated along with the number
of equipment references.
Note: It may take a few seconds for the confirmation message to display.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 and change your equipment number back to <your assigned student
ID> Asset 1.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 185

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 2.4: Create and maintain equipment hierarchy
In this exercise, you will first create an unlinked system. Your instructor will then demonstrate
how to create, define, maintain, and view equipment hierarchy.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create an unlinked system

1. Select Equipment > Systems. The System screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The System screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> UNLINKED SYSTEM in the System field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Unlinked System to the field to the right of the System field.
5. Select * DEFAULT/ALL DEPARTMENTS in the Department field.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Locate equipment and add parent and child

1. Click the Structure tab. The Structure screen opens. You will build a family tree for equipment.
2. Click the first drop-down list under Equipment on the right side of the screen. This is the
Dataspy.
3. Select the Systems Dataspy in the first drop-down list under Equipment.
4. Select Organization in the first filter field under the Dataspy.
5. Click the down arrow next to (A).
6. Select = Equals.
7. Select ORG1 from the last filter drop-down list.
8. Click Run. A list of Systems in ORG1 displays.
9. Drag <your assigned student ID> SYSTEM 1 from the filter grid to Add Parent under Structure
Details.
Note: A green circle with a check mark appears when the item is in the correct spot.
10. Drag <another system> from the filter grid to the child. The child is located to the right of the
parent in the hierarchy tree. You have added the child to the hierarchy.

Part 3: Unlink system

1. Select <the child> in Structure Details.
2. Select Actions > Un-Link. The equipment is removed from the hierarchy.

Part 4: Change equipment hierarchy focal point

1. Select <the system> under Add Parent.
186 Exercises and demos
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 2. Select Actions > Display as Focal Point. The equipment moves under the child. You have a
visual look of the equipment that is linked together.

Part 5: View equipment record details

1. Select <a piece of equipment>.
2. Select Actions > Go to Selection. The equipment displays in Record View.

Part 6: Toggle cost rollup

1. Select Equipment > Systems.
2. Type <your student ID> in the List View search field.
3. Press F8. Results matching your filter criteria are lists.
4. Select the record for <your assigned ID unlinked system>.
5. Click the Structure tab.
6. Select <the equipment> under Add Parent.
7. Select Actions > Display as Focal Point.
8. Select <a piece of equipment> under the child.
9. Select Actions > Toggle Cost Rollup. Cost are not rolled up as indicated by the icon displayed.
10. Select <the child equipment> again.
11. Select Actions > Toggle Cost Rollup. Costs are now rolled up allowing you to see the
associated costs.

Part 7: View immediate parent

1. Select <the child> in Structure Details.
2. Select Actions > Show Parents. The Parent of: <User ID>Unlinked System pop-up window
opens. This shows if it is dependent on the parent.
3. Click Cancel.

Part 8: Create a work order

1. Select <any piece of equipment>.
2. Select Actions > Create WO. The Create Work Order/Activity pop-up window opens. You can
create the details of a work order.
3. Click Cancel. You will not create a work order at this time.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 187

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 2.5: Define closing codes
In this exercise, you will set up closing codes and associate closing codes with classes.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Set up a closing code

1. Select Equipment > Setup > Closing Codes. The Closing Code screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Closing Code screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID>PROB in the Closing Code field
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Problem Code in the unlabeled field description Closing Code
field.
5. Select Problem Code in the Type drop-down list.
6. Clear the Valid for all Equipment Classes check box.
Note: You may need to click the down arrow to the right in the Equipment Details section of the
screen to expose the Valid for all Equipment Classes check box. The closing code is made
available to associate with only specific equipment based on the class defined for the equipment.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Associate closing code with a class

1. Click the Classes tab.
2. Select BLDG - Building from the Class field in the Class Details section of the Closing Code
screen.
3. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays. The Class list is associated with the closing
code.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

188 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 2.6: Configure and generate equipment
This demonstration shows how to configure and generate equipment.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Configure equipment

1. Select Equipment > Equipment Configuration > Equipment Configurations. The Equipment
Configuration screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Equipment Configuration screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> PUMP in the Equipment Configuration field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Vacuum Pump in the field to the right of the Equipment
Configuration field.
5. Select <your department> in the Department field.
6. Select <your class> in the Class field.
7. Select <your category> in the Category field.
8. Select <an employee of your choice> in the Assigned To field.
9. Select Asset in the Equipment Type field, if needed.
10. Select Installed in the Equipment Status field, if needed.
11. Select the Auto Number check box, if needed.
12. Click the PM Schedules tab. Note: The information you added automatically saves.
13. Select AIRCOMP-PM-M - Monthly Aircompressor Inspection in the PM field.
14. Click Submit.
15. Click Save. A confirmation message displays. You have a preventative maintenance attached to
a configuration.

Part 2: Approve configuration

1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Select Request Approval in the Status drop-down list.
3. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
4. Select Approved in the Status drop-down list.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 189

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 3: Equipment generation
1. Select Equipment > Equipment Configuration > Equipment Generation. The Equipment
Generation screen opens.
1. Type Generate Vacuum Pumps in the field to the right of the Session field.
2. Select <your vacuum pump configuration> in the Configuration field.
3. Type 5 in the Generate Count field.
4. Click Save Record.
5. Click the Create/Refresh Preview button located in the middle of the right side of the screen. A
confirmation message displays that a preview has been created.
6. Click the Details tab.
7. Select <the Configuration record> listed at the top of the screen. Details of the record display at
the bottom of the screen.
8. Click the Preview tab. The individual assets display.
9. Select Actions > Generate Equipment at the bottom of the screen. EAM generates the
equipment assets and assigns numbers to each asset.
10. Write down each number here: ____________________________________________________
11. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
12. Type <the first equipment number> in the List View filter field.
13. Press F8. A detailed record displays.
14. Click the PM Schedule tab.
15. Select AIRCOMP-PM-M, Monthly Aircompressor Inspection from the PM schedule list at the
top of the screen. The PM field at the bottom of the screen populates with the selected PM
schedule and it is assigned to this asset.
16. Follow steps 12 through 15 to view the records for the remaining assets.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

190 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 2.7: Define and review meter information
In this exercise, you will define physical and logical meters, enter meter readings, and view
meter history.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define a new physical meter record

1. Select Equipment > Setup > Meters. The Meter screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Meter screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> PHYSICAL METER in the Meter field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> PHYSICAL METER in the field to the right of the Meter field.
5. Select HUR (hour) from the Meter Unit field.
6. Type 999 in the Maximum Value field.
7. Type 200 in the Last Value field.
8. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define a new logical meter

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> Asset 1 in the List View filter field.
3. Select <your asset 1> from List View. Details of the record display in Record View.
4. Select More > Meters. Meter Details display at the bottom of the screen.
5. Select HUR in the UOM field.
6. Select <your physical meter> in the Physical Meter field.
7. Select Standalone in the Type of Meter drop-down list.
Note: The value Standalone may have defaulted.
8. Type 500 in the Total Usage field. This value is the usage of the logical meter.
9. Type 200 in the Usage Since Install field. This value is the usage of the logical meter since the
last change in the equipment hierarchy.
10. Select <yesterday’s date> in the Last Reading Date field.
11. Click Submit. The Meters list is updated.

Part 3: Enter meter readings

1. Select <the meter record> at the top of the screen.
2. Select Actions > Enter Meter Reading in the Meter Details section of the screen. The Add
Meter Reading pop-up window opens.
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 191
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 3. Select Reading from the Entry Type drop-down list.
4. Type 600 in the Value field.

You cannot enter a reading lower than the last reading.

5. Click Submit. The last meter reading displays on the record.

Part 4: View meter history

1. Select <the meter record> at the top of the screen.
2. Select Actions > View Meter History. The Meter History pop-up window opens. The history of
the meter readings displays.

Only the most recent meter readings can be deleted. To delete multiple meter
readings, select them individually starting with the most recent and click Delete
Reading. Save between each deletion.

3. Click Close.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

192 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 2.8: Set up equipment and parts warranties
This demonstration shows how to set up warranties for equipment and parts.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Set up an equipment warranty

1. Select Equipment > Warranty > Warranties. The Warranty screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Warranty screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> WARRANTY in the Warranty field
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Warranty in the unlabeled Warranty description field.
5. Select Equipment in the Warranty Type drop-down list.
6. Select Standard in the Agreement Type drop-down list.
7. Select <today’s date> in the Agreement Start Date field.
8. Select <one year from today’s date> in the Agreement End Date field.
9. Type 30 in the Default Renewal Threshold field.
10. Type <an email address of your choice> in the Renewal Email Alert field.
11. Select Agreement Start Date in the Start Date Basis drop-down list in the Coverage Details
section of the Warranty screen.
12. Type 365 in the Default Duration field.
13. Select the Exclude PM Work Order check box, if needed.
Note: A pop-up window will display on a work order if the equipment is under warranty. You don’t
need to do this for PMs even if they are under warranty.
14. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Add calendar-based warranty coverage to the equipment

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Select <your asset 1>.
3. Select More > Warranties. The Warranties tab displays.
4. Select <your warranty> in the Warranty field.
5. Select <a year from today’s date> from the Expiration Date field.
6. Select the Active check box, if needed.
7. Click Submit. The Warranties list is updated.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 193

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 • If using the COVDURUP installation parameter, you may modify the Duration
field of any warranty coverage record.
• If using the COVDUPAC installation parameter, equipment can only have one
active warranty coverage at any given time.
• The system automatically adjusts the Duration if the Start Date or Expiration
Date is modified.
• The system automatically populates the Expiration Date based on the Start
Date and the warranty Duration. This field may be modified as needed.
• The system automatically populates the Expiration Usage based on the
Starting Usage and the Duration UOM (unit of measure). This field may be
modified as needed.
• To delete warranty coverage from equipment, select the warranty record to
delete, and then click Delete Warranty Coverage. The system deletes the
record and updates the Warranties list.

Part 3: Set up part warranty

1. Select Equipment > Warranty > Warranties. The Warranty screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Warranty screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> WARRANTY PARTS in the Warranty field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Warranty for Parts in the field to the right of the Warranty field.
5. Select Part from the Warranty Type drop-down list.
6. Select Standard in the Agreement Type drop-down list.
7. Select <today’s date> in the Agreement Start Date field.
8. Select <one year from today’s date> in the Agreement End Date field.
9. Select Agreement Start Date in the Start Date Basis drop-down list.
10. Type 365 in the Default Duration field.
11. Type 30 in the Default Renewal Threshold field.
12. Type <an email address of your choice> in the Renewal Email Alert field.
13. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
14. Click the Parts tab.
15. Select <a part of your choice> in the Part field.
16. Type 365 in the Warranty Period field.
17. Select Replacement in the Reimbursement Type drop-down list.
18. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

194 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 2.9: Maintain equipment information
In this exercise, you will maintain equipment information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Transfer a record

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Type <the number of your asset 1> in the List View filter field.
3. Press F8. Your asset is listed.
4. Select <your student ID> Asset 1. Details of the asset display in Record View.
5. Right-click any blank space in the Asset screen. A list of options displays.
6. Select Transfer Equipment in the list of options. The Transfer Equipment pop-up window
opens.
7. Select AUTO in the Organization field.
8. Select Installed in the Status drop-down list.
9. Click Transfer. EAM transfers the record.
10. Type <the number of your asset 2> in the List View filter field.
11. Click F8 to execute the query.
Note: There will be two records, one for each organization where the asset has been.
12. Select the record at the AUTO org.
13. Repeat steps 4-8 to transfer your equipment back to ORG1.

Part 2: View work orders/events related to the equipment

1. Click the Events tab. Review the different event types including your transfers to and from org
AUTO.

Part 3: View equipment costs

1. Type 100000 in the List View filter field.
2. Press F8. A list of records displays.
3. Select 100000 – Boiler #1
4. Click the Costs tab. The cost breakdown associated with the asset displays.
Note: The Refresh Cost Data button causes EAM to calculate the current cost information for
the selected equipment and updates the cost list. The Refresh Cost Data button is only enabled
if new costs need to be calculated.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 195

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 4: View material usage
1. Select More > Material Usage. Material usage transactions for the asset display.

Part 5: View purchase orders for the equipment

1. Type 10001 in the List View filter field.
2. Press F8. Filtered results display.
3. Select 10001 in List View.
4. Select More > Purchase Orders. The Purchase Order tab displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

196 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 3.1: Define trades
In this exercise, you will define trades.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define a trade

1. Select Work > Setup > Trades. The Trade screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Trade screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> TRADE in the Trade field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Trade in the field to the right of the Trade field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define trade rate

1. Click the Rates tab. The value in the Organization field defaults to the organization of the user.
2. Select N-Normal time in the Hours field.
3. Select * DEFAULT/ALL DEPARTMENTS in the Department field.
4. Type 20.00 in the Hourly Rate field.
5. Select <today’s date> in the Start Date field.
6. Select <two years from today’s date> in the End Date field.
7. Click Submit. The Rates list is updated.

Part 3: Define supplier trade rates

1. Select More > Supplier Rates.
2. Select <a supplier of your choice> in the Supplier field.
3. Type 30.00 in the Hourly Rate field.
4. Select ORG1 in the Organization field.
5. Select <today’s date> in the Start Date field.
6. Select <two years from today’s date> in the End Date field.
7. Click Submit. The Supplier Rates list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 197

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 3.2: Define a qualification
This demonstration shows how to define a qualification.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Create a qualification record

1. Select Work > Setup > Qualifications. The Qualification screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Qualification screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> QUA in the Qualification field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Qualification in the unlabeled Qualification description field.
5. Select the Active check box, if needed.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Associate qualifications with trades

1. Select Work > Setup > Trades. The Trade screen opens.
2. Select <your trade> in List View.
3. Select More > Qualifications. The Qualifications tab displays.
4. Select <your qualification> in the Qualification field.
5. Click Submit. The Qualifications list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

198 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 3.3: Define employee information
In this exercise, you will define employee information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define an employee code

1. Select Work > Setup > Employees. The Employee screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Employee screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> EMPLOYEE in the Employee field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Employee in the field to the right of the Employee field.
5. Select * DEFAULT/ALL DEPARTMENTS in the Department field.
6. Select <your trade> from the Trade field.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define an employee rage rate

1. Click the Rates tab. ORG1 defaults in the Organization field.
2. Select N-Normal time in the Hours field.
3. Select * DEFAULT/ALL DEPARTMENTS in the Department field.
4. Type 25.00 in the Hourly Rate field.
5. Select <today’s date> in the Start Date field.
6. Select <two years from today’s date> in the End Date field.
7. Click Submit. The Rates list is updated.
8. Click the Rates tab. The Organization field defaults to ORG1.
9. Click Add Rate.
10. Select N Normal time in the Hours field.
11. Select ELEC in the Department.
12. Type 35.00 in the Hourly Rate field.
13. Select <today’s date> in the Start Date.
14. Select <two years from today’s date> in the End Date field.
15. Click Submit. The Rates list is updated.

Part 3: Transfer employees between organizations

1. Select More > Transfers. The Transfers tab displays.
2. Select FACILITY-Facility Maintenance in the New Organization field.
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 199
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 3. Type <your assigned student ID> 2 in the Historic Employee Code field.
4. Click Submit. The Transfers list is updated.

Part 4: Transfer the employee back to ORG1

1. Select ORG1 in the New Organization field.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> 1 in the Historic Employee Code field.
3. Click Submit. The Transfers list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

200 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 3.4: Define shift information
In this exercise, you will define shift information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define a shift

1. Select Work > Setup > Shifts. The Shift screen opens .
2. Click New Record. The Shift screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your only assigned student number not the starting initials> S in the Shift field. Note: You
are limited to the number of characters in this field. Examples: 01 S, 02 S.
4. Type <your assigned student ID Shift> in the unlabeled Shift description field.
5. Type 7 in the Days in Rotation field.
6. Select <today’s date> in the Shift Start Date field.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define days per shift

1. Click the Days tab.
2. Type 1 in the Day Number field.
3. Type 8 in the Number of Hours field.
4. Select 06 in the first Start Time field.
5. Select 00 in the second Start Time field.

The Start Time field uses a 24-hour clock.

6. Click Submit. The Days list is updated.

7. Type 2 in the Day Number field.
8. Type 8 in the Number of Hours field.
9. Select 14 in the first Start Time field.
10. Select 00 in the second Start Time field.
11. Click Submit. The Days list is updated.

Part 3: Define an employee for a shift

1. Click the Employees tab.
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 201
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 2. Select <your employee> in the Employee field.
3. Select <today’s date> in the Start Date field.
4. Select <six months from today’s date> in the End Date field.
5. Click Submit. The Employees list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

202 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 3.5: Set up and copy material lists
In this exercise, you will set up and copy material lists.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define material list

1. Select Work > WO Planning > Material Lists. The Material List screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Material List screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student number> MATERIAL LIST in the Material List field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Material List in the field to the right of the Material List field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Add a part

1. Click the Parts tab.
2. Select 100-Bushing BLK in the Part field.
3. Select Stock in the Planned Source field.
4. Type 20 in the Quantity field.
5. Select the Reserve check box.
6. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Part 3: Copy a material list

1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Right-click any blank space in the Material List screen. A list of options displays.
3. Select Copy Material List in the list of options. The Copy Material List pop-up window opens.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> MATERIAL LIST 2 in the two New Material List fields.
5. Verify that all check boxes are selected. This ensures that all values will carry over to the new
material list.
6. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays. <Your Material List and New Material List>
display in List View.
7. Select <your New Material List>.
8. Click the Parts tab. The parts display in the Parts list.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 203

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 3.6: Define a permit and maintain permit body comments
This demonstration shows how to define a permit and maintain permit body comments.

Notes:
• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Define a permit

1. Select Work > Permit to Work > Permits. The Permit screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Permit screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student number> PERMIT in the Permit field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Permit in the field to the right of the Permit field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Add permit body comments

1. Click the Permit Body tab.
2. Click Add Comment. The Add/Edit Comment pop-up window opens.
3. Type Confined space entry in the white space of the Add/Edit Instructions pop-up window.
4. Click Save.

Part 3: Modify permit body comments

1. Double-click <your comments>. The Add/Edit Comment pop-up window opens.
2. Type <additional permit comments> in the white space of the Add/Edit Instructions pop-up
window.
3. Click Save. A confirmation message displays.
4. Click the Record View tab.
5. Select Request Approval in the Status field.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
7. Select Approved in the Status field.
8. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

204 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 4.1: Define task plans
In this exercise, you will define a task plan.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps
1. Select Work > Work Order Planning > Task Plans. The Task Plan screen opens.
2. Click New Record. A blank Task Plan record opens.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> TASK PLAN in the Task Plan field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Task Plan for Checklist in the unlabeled Task Plan description
field.

Note the Enable Enhanced Planning check box. If that check box is selected, you
will be able to attach a material list to the task plan.

5. Select the Active Checklist check box.

6. Type Follow up work order in the WO Description field.
7. Select Breakdown in the WO Type field.
8. Select Released – Ready to Schedule in the WO Status field.
9. Select Default work order priority in the WO Priority field.
10. Select <your assigned student ID> TRADE in the Trade field.
11. Type 8 in the Estimated Hours field.
12. Type 1 in the People Required field.
13. Click Save. The task plan item is updated.
14. Select More > Checklist. Checklist displays as a tab displays.
15. Type Visual Inspection in the unlabeled description field to the right of the Checklist Item field in
the Checklist Details section of the screen.
16. Select Checklist Item in the Type field.
17. Type 10 in the Sequence field.
18. Select No in the Required Entry field.
19. Select Header Equipment in the Equipment Level field.
20. Click Submit. The Checklist list is updated in the top section of the screen.
21. Type Take meter reading in the unlabeled description field to the right of the Checklist Item field
in the Checklist Details section of the screen.
22. Type 20 in the Sequence field.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 205

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 23. Select Meter Reading in the Type field.
24. Select No in the Required Entry field.
25. Select Header Equipment in the Equipment Level field.
26. Type HUR in the UOM field. Hours is the unit of measure.
27. Click Submit. The Checklist list is updated in the top section of the screen.
28. Type Change belt in the unlabeled description field to the right of the Checklist Item field in the
Checklist Details section of the screen.
29. Select Checklist Item in the Type field.
30. Type 30 in the Sequence field.
31. Select No in the Required Entry field.
32. Select Header Equipment in the Equipment Level field.
33. Click Submit. The Checklist list is updated in the top section of the screen.
34. Type Clean machine in the unlabeled description field to the right of the Checklist Item field in
the Checklist Details section of the screen.
35. Type 40 in the Sequence field.
36. Select Checklist Item in the Type field.
37. Select Yes in the Required Entry field.
38. Select Header Equipment in the Equipment Level field.
39. Click Submit. The Checklist list is updated in the top section of the screen.
40. Click More. A list of additional tab options display.
41. Click Prices. The Prices tab displays.
42. Select ORG1 Organization 1 at the top section of the Prices screen.
43. Type 150.00 in the Price field.
44. Click Submit. The Price is included in the top section of the screen.
45. Click More. A list of additional tab options display.
46. Click Qualifications. The Qualifications tab displays.
47. Select <any qualification> in the Qualifications field.
48. Click Submit. The Qualification is included in the top section of the screen.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

206 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 4.2: Use an operator checklist
This demonstration shows how to use an operator checklist.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Create a task plan for an operator checklist

1. Select Work > WO Planning > Task Plans. The Task Plan screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Task Plan screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> CHECKLIST TP in the Task Plan field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Task Plan for Checklist in the unlabeled Task Plan description
field.
5. Select the Active Checklist check box.
Note: If you neglect to select the Active Checklist check box, the task plan will not be listed as a
value when trying to use an operator checklist.
6. Type Follow Up Work Order in the WO Description field.
7. Select Breakdown in the WO Type field.
8. Select Released – Ready to Schedule in the WO Status field.
9. Select Default work order priority in the WO Priority field.
10. Click Save Record. Note: You must save the record so you can continue creating the checklist.
11. Select More > Checklist. The Checklist tab displays and it is selected.
12. Type Visual Inspection equipment in the unlabeled description field to the right of the Checklist
Item field in the Checklist Details section of the screen.
13. Type 10 in the Sequence field.
14. Select Checklist Item in the Type field.
15. Select No in the Required Entry field.
16. Select Header Equipment in the Equipment Level field.
17. Click Submit. The Checklist list is updated in the top section of the screen.
18. Type Measure Pressure in the unlabeled description field to the right of Checklist Item.
19. Type 20 in the Sequence field.
20. Select Checklist Item in the Type field.
21. Select No in the Required Entry field.
22. Select Header Equipment in the Equipment Level field.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 207

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 23. Select PIPECHECKLIST in the Follow-up Task Plan field.
24. Click Submit. The Checklist list is updated with the second checklist item.

Part 2: Use the checklist

1. Select Work > Additional Features > Operator Checklist > Operator Checklist. The Operator
Checklist screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Task Plan screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Select <your assigned student ID> ASSET 1 in the Equipment field.
4. Select <your assigned student ID> CHECKLIST TP in the Task Plan field.
5. Click the Create Checklist button. A confirmation message displays and the bottom section of
the screen displays a checklist.
6. Click the Completed check box in the Result column for Sequence 10.
7. Click the Completed check box in the Result column for Sequence 20.
8. Click the check box Follow up column for Sequence 20.
9. Click the Actions menu at the bottom-left of the screen. A list of options displays.
10. Select Create Follow-up WO. A confirmation message indicating two records were processed
displays.
11. Click the Move to Complete button. A confirmation message displays.

Part 3: View the follow-up work order

1. Select Work > Work Order. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click the Run icon in the List View filter field.
3. Select <your follow up work order>.
4. Click the Activities tab. Activities associated with the work order display.
5. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
6. Type <your assigned student ID> Asset 1 in the List View filter field.
7. Click Run.
8. Click More. Additional tab options display.
9. Select Operator Checklist. The associated checklist displays.
10. Double-click <your assigned student ID> CHECKLIST. The Checklist Items pop-up window
opens listing individual items involved with the work order.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

208 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 4.3: Define a standard work order
In this exercise, you will define a standard work order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define the work order

1. Select Work > WO Planning >Standard WOs.
2. Click New Record. The Standard WO screen opens.
3. Select ORG1 in the Organization field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> STANDARD WO in the Standard WO field.
5. Type <your assigned student ID> Standard Work Order in the unlabeled Standard WO
description field.
6. Select <your assigned student ID>PROB in the Problem Code field.
7. Select Breakdown in the WO Type field.
8. Click Save. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define standard work order activity

1. Click the Activities tab.
2. Accept the 10 in the Activity field.
3. Select <your assigned student ID> TASK PLAN in the Task Plan field.
4. Select <your assigned student ID> MATERIAL LIST in the Material List field.
5. Click Submit. Activity 10 is created and associated with the standard work order.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 209

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 4.4: Generate a work order using a standard work order
This demonstration shows how to generate a work order using a standard work order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Work > Work Order. The Work Oder screen opens.
2. Select <your assigned student ID> STANDARD WO in the Standard WO field under Work
Order Details. EAM populates the Problem Code field and other fields associated with your
work order.
3. Select your assigned student ID> ASSET 1 in the Equipment field. A system message
indicates the equipment is under warranty.
4. Click OK. EAM populates the Department field.
5. Click Save. A confirmation message displays.
6. Click the Activities tab. The defined activities display in a list detailing associated trades, task
plans, material lists, and other details.
7. Click the Parts tab. Parts associated with the standard work order are listed.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

210 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 4.5: Define PM routes for equipment
This demonstration shows how to define PM routes for equipment.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Work > WO Planning > Routes. The Route screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Route screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> ROUTE in the Route field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Route in the field to the right of the Route field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
6. Click the Equipment tab.
7. Select 10013 – BURLWOOD DR in the Equipment field.
8. Click Submit. The Equipment list is updated for the route.
9. Select 10014 – MONTICELLO ST in the Equipment field.
10. Click Submit. The Equipment list is updated for the route.
11. Select 10015 – CLOVER LN in the Equipment field.
12. Click Submit. The Equipment list is updated for the route.
13. Click the Record View tab.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 211

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 4.6: Define PM schedule
In this exercise, you will define a preventative maintenance schedule.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define a PM schedule

1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Click New Record. The PM Schedule screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> PM SCHEDULE in the PM Schedule field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> PM Schedule in the unlabeled PM Schedule description field.
5. Select Fixed from the Type drop-down list.
6. Select Preventive maintenance from the WO Type drop-down list. Note the other values that
can be selected for PM schedules.
7. Type 5 in the Duration field.
8. Select Default work order priority in the Priority field.
9. Type 30 in the Perform Every field.
10. Select Days from the drop-down list to the right of the Perform Every field.
11. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define an activity

1. Click the Activities tab.
2. Select <your task plan> in the Task Plan field. Note the values in the following fields populate
as they are linked to the task plan:
• Trade
• Estimated Hours
• Start
• Duration
3. Select <your material list> in the Material List field.
4. Click Submit. The Activities list is updated.

Part 3: Define equipment for PM schedules

1. Click the Equipment tab.
2. Select <your equipment> in the Equipment field. Note: Your equipment will be <your student
ID> ASSET 1.

212 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 3. Select * Default department in the Department field.
Note: The department of the equipment record will automatically populate if this field is left blank.
4. Select 100 in the Location field.
5. Select <a week from today’s date> in the Due Date field.
Note: You must enter a Due Date or the schedule will not work.
6. Select <your employee> from the Assigned To field.
7. Select ANDERSON – Dick Anderson from the Supervisor field.
8. Click Submit. The Equipment list is updated.

Part 4: Attach a PM schedule to equipment

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Select <an asset of your choice>.
3. Click the PM Schedules tab.
4. Select <your student ID>PM SCHEDULE in the PM field. Note that the value in Perform Every
field populates automatically. It is linked to the PM schedule.
5. Select <your employee> from the Assigned To field.
6. Select ANDERSON – Dick Anderson from the Supervisor field.
7. Select * Default department in the Department field.
8. Select <a month from today’s date> in the Due Date field.
9. Click Submit. The PM Schedules list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 213

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 4.7: Generate individual preventive maintenance work orders
This demonstration shows how to generate individual preventive maintenance work
orders.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Work > Process > Release Individual PM WOs.
2. Click Run. The Release Individual PM WOs screen displays listing work orders.
3. Select <your student ID> PM SCHEDULE work order in the list.
4. Click the A for your work order in the Work Order status column.
5. Type R to replace the A.
6. Press Update PMs. A confirmation message displays indicating that the work order is released.
7. Write down the work order number here: ________________________.
8. Select Work > Work Orders.
9. Type <the work order number that you wrote down in step 7> in the List View filter field.
10. Press Enter. The work order is listed.
11. Note that the work order now has the status of Released.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

214 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 4.8: Generate work orders using the Generate WOs screen
This demonstration shows how to generate a work orders using the Generate WOs
screen.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Work> Process > Generate WOs.
2. Select <two weeks from today’s date> in the Generate Through field.
3. Select the Release WOs for Fixed/Variable PMs check box, if needed.
4. Select Generate WOs for Duplicate PMs check box.
5. Select the Print Summary Report check box.
6. Select the Print Work Orders check box.
7. Click the Process button. Work orders display that fit the parameters you entered.
8. Select the check box beside the work orders you want to generate. Note: You can select the
check box beside Select to select all work orders.
9. Click the Generate button. The work order is generated as a pdf file for the selected record.
10. Scroll through the work order to view the details.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 215

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.1: Create, approve, and reject work requests
In this exercise, you will create, approve, and reject work request.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a work request

1. Select Work > Work Requests. The Work Request screen opens.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> Work Request in the Description field.
3. Select <your equipment> from the Equipment field. Your equipment is <your assigned
student ID> Asset 1 and the Department field is populated with the department associated with
the equipment.
4. Select Breakdown from the Type drop-down list. This is the default.
5. Note the following:
• The value in the Status drop-down list is Work request.
• The value in the Date Reported field is the current date and time. This can be changed.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays. Note: the work request number in the
Work Request field.
7. Click Add Comment in the Comments section of the screen. The Add/Edit Comments pop-up
window opens. Note: You may need to click the Expand panel icon in the Comments panel to
see this option.
8. Type Leaking forklift in Bay 3 in the white space of the Add/Edit Instructions pop-up window.
9. Click Save. <Your comments> display in the Comments section of the Work Request screen.
Note the time stamp, date, and user who entered the work request.

Part 2: Copy a work request

1. Click the Copy Record icon on the Work Request screen. <Your work request> is copied. Note
that the comments do not display.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> Work Request 2 in the Description field.
3. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
4. Click Add Comment in the Comments section of the screen. The Add/Edit Comments pop-up
window opens.
5. Type <a description of your choice> in the in the white space of the Add/Edit Instructions pop-
up window.
6. Click Save. <Your comments> display in the Comments section of the Work Request screen.
Note the time stamp, date, and user who entered the work request.

216 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 3: Review work requests
1. Select Work > Review Work Requests. The Review Work Requests screen opens.
2. Click Run. The list of work requests displays.
3. Double-click <your first work request>. <Your work request> displays.
4. Select Default work order priority from the Priority drop-down list.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
6. Click Add Comment. The Add/Edit Comments pop-up window opens.
7. Type <a description of your choice> in the in the white space of the Add/Edit Instructions pop-
up window.
8. Click Save. <Your comments> display below <your first comments> in the Comments section
of the Work Request screen.

Part 4: Approve a work request

1. Select Work > Review Work Requests. The Review Work Requests screen opens.
2. Click Run. The list of work requests displays.
3. Select the check box beside <your first work request>.
4. Click the Approve button. A confirmation message displays.

Part 5: Reject a work request

1. Select the check box beside <your second work request>.
2. Click the Reject button. The Reject Reason pop-up window opens.
3. Type Faulty Sprayer in the Reject Reason field.
4. Click OK. A confirmation message displays.

Work requests, once submitted, are available to be viewed and edited by authorized
users in the Work Order screen. They can be found by searching for the status of
the work request pending configuration settings.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 217

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.2: Define and create a work order and work order activity
In this exercise, you will create work order, define a header and activities, add and schedule
labor and equipment, and assign qualifications to the work order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Add a work order record with work record details

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Work Order screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Confirm that ORG1 displays in the Organization field. If it is not correct, select it.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Work Order in the Work Order field.
5. Select <your asset> from the Equipment field.
Note: If a warranty is associated with the equipment, you will get a message indicating a
warranty. Click OK to dismiss.
6. Select <your location> from the Location field.
7. Select Ready to Schedule/Assign from the Status drop-down list.
8. Select the Safety check box.
9. Select Rupture from the Problem Code field.
10. Select <any employee> from the Reported By field.
11. Select <any supervisor> from the Assigned By field.
12. Select <any employee> from the Assigned To field.
13. Select <today’s date> from the Sched Start Date field.
14. Select <60 days from today’s date> from the Sched. End Date field.
15. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Define a work order activity

1. Select <your task plan> from the Task Plan field in the Activity section of the screen. Note the
values that populate the Trade, Estimated Hours, and People Required fields. These values
are tied to the task plan.
2. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 3: Define a second activity

1. Click the Activities tab. <Your first activity> displays.
2. Select BOIL-Boiler Tech from the Trade field. Note the value that populates the People
Required field.

218 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
3. Type 40 in the Estimated Hours field. The People Required field automatically populates with 5
as the field value.
4. Select <today’s date> from the Sched Start Date field.
5. Select <60 days from today’s date> in the End Date field.
6. Select the Hired Labor check box.
7. Click Submit. The Activities list is updated and now there are two activities listed.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 219

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.3: Add comments to a work order and book labor
In this exercise, you will add comments to a work order and book labor.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Add comments to a work order

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click Run in the List View filter field. The list of work orders displays.
3. Select <your work order> from List View. <Your work order> displays in Record View.
4. Click the Comments tab.
5. Click Add Comment. The Add/Edit Comments pop-up window opens.
6. Type Punctured by nail on floor in the white space of the Add/Edit Instructions pop-up window.
7. Click Save. <Your comment> displays with a time stamp, date, and user who created the
comments.

Part 2: Book labor by employee

1. Click the Book Labor tab.
2. Click the Add Labor icon in the Labor Details section of the Work Order screen.
3. Select <your activity> from the Activity drop-down list.
4. Select <your employee> from the Employee field.
5. Select <last Monday’s date> form the Date Worked field.
6. Type 4 in the Hours Worked field.
7. Click Submit. The Book Labor list is updated.

You can also book labor by selecting Work > Process > Book Labor By Employee.
This way is useful for the employee who wants to book his/her labor for the entire
day.

8. Click the <your activity >. The Labor Details fields are populated.
9. Select <your employee> from the Employee field.
10. Select <last Monday’s date> in the Date Worked field.
11. Type -1 in the Hours Worked field.
12. Click Submit. The Book Labor list is updated with both activities. The second line shows the -1
adjustment to Hours Worked. When costs are calculated for this activity, it will be based on three
hours.

220 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
13. Select Work > Process > Book Labor By Employee. The Book Labor By Employee screen
opens.
14. Select <your assigned student ID> EMPLOYEE from the Employee field.
15. Click the Lookup icon in the field to the right of the WO-Activity field under Labor Details. The
Work Orders pop-up window opens.
16. Select <your work order> from the list.
17. Click OK. <Your trade> displays.
18. Select <your trade>.
19. Click OK.
20. Select <today’s date> from the Date Worked field.
21. Type 2 in the Hours Worked field.
22. Click Submit. The Book Labor by Employee list is updated

• To copy a line, select the line and click Actions > Copy Record.
• To clear fields, click the Clear icon to clear the information before you submit
the information.
• To correct booked labor overage, enter a negative value in the Hours Worked
field.
• Use the F9 key in data entry fields for convenient lookups.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 221

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.4: Manage parts for work orders
In this exercise, you will manage parts for work orders.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Add a planned part

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click Run in the List View filter field. The list of work requests displays.
3. Select <your work order> from List View. <Your work order> displays in Record View.
4. Click the Parts tab.
5. Select <a part of your choice> from the Parts field.
6. Select <your trade activity> from the Activity drop-down list.
7. Select Direct Purchase from the Planned Source drop-down list.
8. Type 2 in the Planned Qty field.
9. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Part 2: Reserve parts for work orders

1. Click the Add Part icon in the Parts Detail & Planning section of the Work Order screen.
2. Select 100044-ADAPTER from the Parts field.
3. Select <your trade activity> from the Activity drop-down list.
4. Select Stock from the Planned Source drop-down list.
5. Type 3 in the Reserved Qty field.
6. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Part 3: View planned parts for work orders

1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Right-click anywhere on the Work Order screen. A list of options displays.
3. Select View Planned Part Availability from the list of options. The Planned Part Availability pop-
up window opens. The parts for the activity display.
4. Select FAC-Main from the Store field in the Planned Part Availability pop-up window.
5. View the value in the Available Quantity and Shortage Qty fields.
6. Click Close.

222 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 4: Import a parts list
1. Click the Parts tab.
2. Select Actions > Import Parts List in the Parts Detail & Planning section of the Work Order
screen. The Import Parts List pop-up window opens.
3. Select Material List from the From drop-down list.
4. Select <your material list> from the field to the right of the From drop-down list.
5. Select <your trade activity> from the Activity drop-down list.
6. Select the check box beside <the part to import>.
7. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Part 5: Create a parts requisition

1. Select <the part you chose in part 1 of this exercise> from the Parts list on the Work Order
screen.
2. Select Actions > Create Parts Requisition in the Parts Detail & Planning section of the Work
Order screen. The Create Parts Requisition pop-up window opens.
3. Type <your assigned student ID Part Requisition> in the Description field.
4. Select FAC-MAIN from the Store field.
5. Select <any employee> from the Requested By field.
6. Select AMPROBE from the Supplier field.
7. Select the check box <for your part>. You are adding the part to the requisition.
8. Click Create Requisition. A confirmation message displays.

Part 6: Issue parts to a work order

1. Click the Parts tab.
2. Select the 100044-ADAPTER from the Parts list.
3. Select FAC-ELEC from the Store field.
4. Select Issue from the Transaction Type drop-down list.
5. Type 5 in the Quantity field.
6. Select *T.B.D. from the Bin field.
7. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 223

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 7: Return parts from a work order
1. Select 100044-ADAPTER from the Parts list.
2. Select FAC-ELEC from the Store list.
3. Select Return from the Transaction Type drop-down list.
4. Type 5 in the Quantity field.
5. Select <today’s date> from the Date field.
6. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

224 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 5.5: Additional costs for work orders
This demonstration shows how to add additional costs for work orders.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Select <your work order>.
3. Click the Additional Costs tab.
4. Select <your trade> from the Activity drop-down list.
5. Select Own Labor from the Cost Type drop-down list.
6. Type Clean up crew in the Cost Description field.
7. Select <today’s date> in the Date field.
8. Type 100.00 in the Cost field.
9. Click Submit. The Additional Costs list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 225

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.6: Enter meter readings for work order equipment
In this exercise, you will enter meter readings for work order equipment.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps
1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Select <your work order> from List View. <Your work order> displays in Record View.
3. Select More > Meter Readings. The Meter Readings tab displays.
4. Select Hour from the UOM drop-down list. The target equipment populates the Equipment and
other fields.
Note: Always select the UOM first.
5. Select Reading from the Entry Type drop-down list.
6. Select <today’s date> from the Date/Time field. The current time displays.
7. Type 100 in the New Value field.
8. Click Submit. The Meter Readings list is updated.
9. Click Yes if a message displays indicating that the new value is less than the last reading and
that the meter has rolled over.

• The meter for the equipment on a work order can be the child meter of a meter
attached to a parent of the equipment. In such cases, the parent equipment and parent
meter should receive the new reading submitted for the child meter, and the new
reading must roll down to all of the child equipment of the parent.
• The Last Value field is zero when the new meter reading record is the first entry made
for the UOM of the target equipment.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

226 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 5.7: View and modify work order information
This demonstration shows how to view and modify work order information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: View work order detail

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Select <your work order> from List View.
3. Type <a change to the name of the work order> in the field to the right of the Work Order field.
4. Press F10. A confirmation message displays. Note: Pressing F10 is another way to save the
record.

Part 2: View work order costs

1. Click the Cost Summary tab. Costs associated with the work order display.

Part 3: View purchasing for a work order

1. Select More > Purchasing. The Purchasing tab displays. <Your parts requisition> displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 227

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.8: Schedule work for an individual work order
In this exercise, you will schedule work for an individual work order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a work order schedule

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Select <your work order> from List View.
3. Click the Record View tab.
4. Write down the value in the Assigned To field here: ______________________. You will use
this value in one of the next steps.
5. Select More > Schedule Labor. The Schedule Labor tab displays.
6. Select + Add Schedule to add a schedule.
7. Select <your trade activity> from the Activity field. Note that <your trade> populates the Trade
field.
8. Type <tomorrow’s date> in the Sched. Start Date field.
9. Select <the name you wrote down from step 7> from the Employee field.
10. Click Submit.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

228 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 5.9: Batch work order scheduling
This demonstration shows how to perform batch work order scheduling.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Perform work order daily scheduling

1. Select Work >WO Planning > WO Daily Scheduling. The WO Daily Scheduling screen opens.
2. Click the Expand icon at WO Scheduled Start Date Range. Start Date and End Date display.
3. Select <today’s date> in the Start Date field.
4. View the criteria in the Scheduling Options section. The Threshold Percent Between
Lightly/Moderately Scheduled field is the percentage of daily employee available hours to
designate the point at which the calendar switches between lightly scheduled and moderately
scheduled.
5. Click the Create/Refresh Previews button.
6. Click the Equipment Preview tab. You can select the pieces of equipment you want to schedule
within the organization.
7. Click the WO Activity Preview tab. All the unscheduled work order activity available for
scheduling displays.
8. Click the Employee Preview tab. All employees available for scheduling display.
9. Click the Daily Scheduling tab. You perform daily scheduling from this tab. A pop-up window
opens with the message that daily scheduling has been started, changes cannot be made, and
relevant work order and employee records have been locked.
10. Click OK.
11. Drag <a work order> to a green cell on the schedule that is associated with an employee. The
value in the Hours Remaining to be Scheduled column should be zero.
12. Click the Close Session and Update Work Orders icon located above the schedule on the right
side of the screen. A pop-up window opens with the message that all WO and scheduling
changes made in the session will be updated.
13. Click Yes. Print Work Order opens as a pdf file.
14. Click the X in the top-right corner of Print Work Order to close it. You return to the WO Daily
Scheduling screen.

Part 2: Perform work order scheduling

1. Select Work >WO Planning > WO Scheduling. The WO Scheduling screen opens.
2. Select Employee from the Schedule By drop-down list.
3. Select <your employee> in the Employee field. This allows you to schedule work by employee.
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 229
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 4. Click the Calculate Availability button. The Calculate Availability pop-up window opens.
5. Select ORG1 in the Organization field.
6. Click Calculate. A confirmation message displays indicate that labor availability has been
generated for the time period you defined.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Close. The Calculate Availability pop-up window closes.
9. Drag <a work order> from the left panel to an available cell in the schedule.
10. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

230 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.10: Close a work order
In this exercise, you will close a work order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a work order to close

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Work Order screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> Work Order to Close in the field to the right of the Work Order
field.
4. Confirm that ORG1 displays in the Organization field. If it is not correct, select it.
5. Select <equipment of your choice> from the Equipment field.
6. Select Breakdown from the Type drop-down list.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Close the work order

1. Click the Closing tab.
2. Select <today’s date> from the Start Date field.
3. Type 2 in the Downtime Hours field.
4. Select <a problem code of your choice> in the Problem Code field. The Date Completed field
automatically populates with today’s date.
5. Select <a failure code of your choice> in the Failure Code field.
6. Select <a cause code of your choice> in the Cause Code field.
7. Select <an action code of your choice> in the Action Code field.
8. Select Add Comment in the Work Performed section of the Work Order screen. The Add/Edit
Comments pop-up window opens.
9. Type Changed gasket in the white space of the Add/Edit Comments pop-up window.
10. Click Save.
11. Select Completed from the Status drop-down list.
12. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 231

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 5.11: Complete and close a work order on the Quick Entry and
Quick Close screens
In this exercise, you will complete a work order on the Quick Entry screen.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a work order via the Quick Entry screen

1. Select Work > WO Quick Entry. The WO Quick Entry screen opens.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> Quick Entry in the field to the right of the Work Order field.
3. Select <equipment of your choice> from the Equipment field.
4. Select Breakdown from the Type drop-down list.
5. Select <a trade of your choice> from the Trade field.
6. Type 4 in the Estimated Hours field.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Close the work order via the Quick Entry screen
1. Select Work > WO Quick Close. The WO Quick Close screen opens.
2. Select <your quick entry work order> from the Work Order field.
3. Select <today’s date> from the Date Completed field.
4. Type 1 in the Downtime Hours field.
5. Select <a problem code of your choice> from the Problem Code field.
6. Select <a failure code of your choice> from the Failure Code field.
7. Select <a cause code of your choice> from the Cause Code field.
8. Select <an action code of your choice> from the Action Code field.
9. Type <comments of your choice> in the Closing Comments field.
10. Select <an activity of your choice> from the Activity drop-down list.
11. Select <a trade of your choice> from the Trade field.
12. Select <an employee of your choice> from the Employee field.

232 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
13. Select N – Normal time from the Type of Hours field.
14. Type <a number of your choice> in the Hours field.
15. Click the Save Hours icon.
16. Select Completed from the New Status drop-down list.
17. Click Save. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 233

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 6.1: Create a store and store bins
In this exercise, you will create a store and store bins.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a store

1. Select Materials > Setup > Stores. The Store screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Store screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> STORE in the Store field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Store in the field to the right of the Store field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Create two store bins

1. Click the Bins tab.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> BIN 1 in the Bin field.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> Bin 1 in the Description field.
4. Click Submit. The Bins list is updated.
5. Type <your assigned student ID> BIN 2 in the Bin field.
6. Type <your assigned student ID> Bin 2 in the Description field.
7. Click Submit. The Bins list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

234 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 6.2: Define and associate manufacturer information
In this exercise, you will define and associate manufacturer information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define manufacturer information

1. Select Materials > Setup > Manufacturers. The Manufacturer screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Manufacturer screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> MANUFACTURER in the Manufacturer field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Manufacturer in the field to the right of the Manufacturer field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Associate a part with a manufacturer

1. Click the Parts tab.
2. Select <any part> from the Parts field.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> in the Manufacturer Part Number field.
4. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 235

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 6.3: Define a supplier
In this exercise, you will define a supplier.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define a supplier

1. Select Materials > Setup > Suppliers. The Supplier screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Supplier screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> SUPPLIER in the Supplier field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Supplier in the field to the right of the Supplier field.
5. Select English from the Language drop-down list.
6. Type USD in the Currency field.
7. Select the Service Provider check box. This identifies the supplier providing services. You would
leave this check box clear if the supplier is only for purchasing materials.
8. Select the Purchase Site check box.
9. Type 3 in the Lead Time (Days) field. This identifies the average number of days the supplier
needs to provide the ordered goods or services.
10. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Add supplier address information

1. Click the Addresses tab.
2. Select Mail from the Address Type drop-down list.
3. Type <a phone number of your choice> in the Telephone field.
4. Type <a street address, state, and zip code of your choice> in the Full Address field.
5. Click Submit. The Address list is updated.

Part 3: Define supplier contacts

1. Click the Contacts tab.
2. Type 1 in the Sequence Number field.
3. Type <a name of your choice> in the Name field.
4. Select E-mail in the Preferred Contact Method field.
5. Type <an address of your choice> in the Address 1 field.
6. Type <a city of your choice> in the City field.
7. Type <a state of your choice> in the State field.

236 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 8. Type <a zip code of your choice> in the Zip Code field.
9. Type <an email address of your choice> in the Primary E-mail field.
10. Type <a phone number of your choice> in the Primary Phone field.
11. Click Submit. The Contacts list is updated.

Part 4: Copy supplier information

1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Right-click anywhere on the Supplier screen. A list of options displays.
3. Select Copy Supplier from the list of options. The Copy Supplier or Customer pop-up window
opens.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Supplier 2 in the New Supplier or Customer fields. You will
need to do this in both fields.
5. Verify that all Copy Record Options check boxes are selected.
6. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays.
7. Click the Contacts tab. <Your contact> displays in the List View panel.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 237

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 6.4: Create a supplier catalog
In this exercise, you will create a supplier catalog.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a supplier catalog

1. Select Materials > Setup > Suppliers. The Supplier screen opens.
2. Select <your supplier 1> from List View.
3. Click the Parts tab.
4. Select <any part> from the Part field.
5. Type <your assigned student ID> Part in the Supplier Part Desc field.
6. Type <your assigned student ID> in the Catalog Reference field.
7. Type <a price of your choice> in the Gross Price field.
8. Select the Preferred Supplier check box.
9. Type EA in the UOP field.
10. Type 1 in the Qty per UOP field. Note that the Lead Time (Days) field value carries over from
the header.
11. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Part 2: Define supplier rates

1. Select More > Rates. The Rates tab displays.
2. Select <your trade> from the Trade field.
3. Type 50.00 in the Hourly Rate field.
4. Select <today’s date> in the Start Date field.
5. Select <one year from today’s date> in the End Date field.
6. Click Submit. The Rates list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

238 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 6.5: Manage and maintain store parts information
In this exercise, you will manage and maintain store parts information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create part

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Part screen displays as a blank record.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> PART in the Part field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Part in the unlabeled Part description field.
5. Select EA in the UOM field.
6. Select Stock in the Tracking Method field.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Associate a manufacturer with part

1. Select More > Manufacturers.
2. Select <your manufacturer> in the Manufacturer field.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> Manufacturer in the Manufacturer Part Number field.
4. Select the Primary check box.
5. Click Submit. The Manufacturer list is updated.

Part 3: Associate a supplier with part

1. Click the Suppliers tab.
2. Select <your supplier> in the Supplier field.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> in the Supplier Part Desc field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> in the Catalog Reference field.
5. Type 14.00 in the Gross Price field.
6. Type 1 in the Minimum Order Qty field.
7. Type EA in the UOP field.
8. Type 1 in the Qty per UOP field.
Note: The Lead Time (Days) field has a value that was carried over.
9. Click Submit. The Supplier list is updated.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 239

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 4: Change a part number
1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Right-click any blank space in the record. A list of options displays.
3. Select Change Part Number. The Change Part Number pop-up window opens.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> NEW PART NUMBER.
5. Click Submit. The Part Number is changed.

Part 5: Associate part to stores

1. Click the Stores tab.
2. Select <your store> in the Store field.
3. Select A in the ABC Class drop-down list.
4. Type 2 in the Reorder Level field.
5. Type 3 in the Order Qty field.
6. Select <your assigned student ID> BIN 1 in the Default Bin field.
7. Select Average price in the Price Type drop-down list.
8. Click Submit. The Store is defined.

Part 6: Provide stock data

1. Click the Stock tab.
2. Select <your store> in the Store field.
3. Select <your assigned student ID> BIN 1 in the Bin field.
4. Type 5 in the Qty on Hand field.
5. Click Submit. The Stock Details are defined.

Part 7: Review transactions by part

1. Click the Transactions tab.
2. Review the following fields:
• Transaction Qty – provides quantity on hand
• Type – provides status of Goods received
• Date Last Issued – contains no date because this is a brand-new part
• Date Last Received – contains today’s date as we just changed the Qty on Hand

240 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 8: Review transactions by store
1. Select Materials > Setup > Stores. The Store screen opens.
2. Select <your store> in the List View panel. Details of the record display in Record View.
3. Click the Transactions tab.
4. Review the following fields:
• Transaction Qty – provides quantity on hand
• Type – provides status of Goods received
Note: This store view provides the same information as viewing by part.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 241

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 6.6: Global search for parts
This demonstration shows how to use the global parts search feature.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Click Expand Right. Parts display in List View.
3. Select Global Search from the drop-down filter on the right-side of the screen.
4. Select Contains from the (A) drop-down list.
5. Type <your assigned student ID> in the field to the right of the (A) drop-down list. This searches
for part number, manufacturer part number, supplier catalog reference, and alternative catalog
reference.
6. Click Run. A list of parts displays. Note: You can also press F8 instead of clicking Run.
7. Scroll through the list to see <your assigned student ID> in the Part list.
8. Double-click <the part number listed with a value in the Preferred Supplier field>. The part
displays in Record View.
9. Click the Suppliers tab. Your supplier displays in the Catalog Reference and other columns.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

242 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 7.1: Transfer parts
In this exercise, you will transfer parts.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Transfer parts between bins

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Select <your part> from List View.
3. Click the Stock tab.
4. Select <the stock you want to move>.
5. Select Actions > Transfer Part between Bins. The Transfer Part between Bins pop-up window
opens.
6. Select <your assigned ID> BIN 2 from the New Bin field.
7. Type 1 in the Transfer Qty field.
8. Click Submit. The Stock list is updated by transferring the specified quantity of the part from the
sending bin to the receiving bin and updates the Qty. on Hand field for the selected bins on the
Stock list.

Part 2: Quick store-to-store transfer

1. Select Materials > Transactions > Quick Store-to-Store Transfer. The Quick Store-to-Store
Transfer screen opens.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> Store to Store Transfer in the Transfer Desc field.
3. Select <your store> from the From Store field.
4. Type <you assigned student ID> in the Reference Number field.
5. Select FAC-MAIN from the To Store field.
6. Select <your part> from the Part field.
7. Select <your bin 1> from the From Bin field.
8. Select * T.B.D. from the To Bin field.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 243

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 9. Type 1 in the Transfer On Hand Qty field.
10. Click the Add to List icon. The Transaction Details list is updated.
Note: You may receive the following message: “The part not held in requesting store and Part
does not exist in the selected supplier’s catalog. Record will be created.” Click OK.

The Add to List icon looks exactly like the Submit icon.

11. Click Submit Transaction in the bottom-right corner of the screen.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

244 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 7.2: Issue/Return Parts screen
This demonstration shows how to issue parts from the Parts Issue/Return screen.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Issue part

1. Select Materials > Transactions > Issue/Return Parts. The Issue/Return Parts screen opens.
2. Select MA-1 from the Store field.
3. Click the Lookup icon in the WO-Activity field. The Work Orders pop-up window opens.
4. Select <your work order/activity> from the list of work orders.
5. Click OK.
6. Select <your activity>.
7. Click OK. The Material List and Department fields are automatically populated.
8. Select 100-BUSHING BLK from the Part field.
9. Select 1-C from the Bin field.
10. Type 1 in the Transaction Qty field.
11. Click Add to List. The Parts list is updated.
12. Click the Submit Transaction button. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Return part

1. Select Return from the Transaction Type drop-down list.
2. Select <your work order/activity> from the WO/Activity field.
3. Select <your trade> form the WO/Activity field.
4. Select 100-BUSHING BLK from the Part field.
5. Select 1-C from the Bin field.
6. Type 1 in the Transaction Qty field.
7. Click Add to List. The Parts list is updated.
8. Click Submit Transaction. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 245

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 7.3: Issue and return parts from a part’s stock record
In this exercise, you will issue and return parts from a part’s stock record.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Issue part

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Select <your part> from List View.
3. Click the Stock tab.
4. Select <a stock line that has inventory>.
5. Select Actions > Issue Part. The Issue Part pop-up window opens.
6. Select <your work order and activity> in the Work Order - Activity field. The Department field
is populated because it is associated with the equipment.
7. Select <your employee> from the Issue To field.
8. Type 1 in the Issue Qty field.
9. Click Submit. The part is issued.

Part 2: Return part

1. Select <a stock line>.
2. Select Actions > Return Part. The Return Part pop-up window opens.
3. Select <your work order and activity> in the Work order - Activity field.
4. Type 1 in the Return Qty field.
5. Select <your employee> from the Issue To field.
6. Click Submit. The stock record is updated with the return part.

Part 3: View transactions

1. Click the Transactions tab.
2. Note the lines that show issues and returns.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

246 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 7.4: View and modify part, store, and price information
This demonstration shows how to view and modify part, store, and price information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Modify the part

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Select 10000 Pump from List View side of Split View.
3. Type Plastic Ties at the end of the description in the unlabeled Part description field.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Modify parameters

1. Click the Stores tab.
2. Select <a part line>. Details of the part display in the Order Details section of the screen.
3. Type 63.00 in the Average Price field.
4. Type 3 in the Reorder Level field.
5. Click Submit.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 247

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 7.5: Complete a physical inventory
This demonstration shows how to complete a physical inventory.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Materials > Transactions > Physical Inventory. The Physical Inventory screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Physical Inventory screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Select <FAC-MAIN> from the Store field.
4. Type Main Store Inventory in the Description field.
5. Click the Parts tab. The parts that are to be inventoried display and the record is automatically
saved.
6. Type <the actual quantity of each part counted> in each cell that corresponds to the part in the
Physical Qty column.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
8. Click the Record View tab.
9. Select Approved from the Status field.
10. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

248 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 7.6: Generate a requisition
This demonstration shows how to generate a requisition.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Define preferred supplier, reorder quantity, stock method, and order quantity
1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Select 10003 - Gasket from List View.
3. Click the Stores tab.
4. Select MA – 1 Main Store from the Stores list.
5. Select <a supplier of your choice> from the Preferred Supplier field.
6. Type 150 in the Average Price field.
7. Select Reorder Level from the Stock Method drop-down list.
8. Type 2 in the Reorder Level field.
9. Type 5 in the Order Qty field.
10. Click Submit.

Part 2: Generate the requisition

1. Select Materials > Process > Generate Requisitions. The Generate Requisitions screen
opens.
2. Select <your employee> from the Requested By field.
3. Select the Print Requisition check box.
4. Select the Generate Part Requisitions check box.
5. Click Process. The Parts Preview tab opens automatically. Requisition lines display based on
the parameters set to generate a requisition such as below reorder level or on-demand. Note that
each requisition line is selected. You can clear any of the check boxes as needed.
6. Select the Select check box to clear all check boxes.
7. Select <the requisition line for parts 10000 and 10002>.
Note: These requisition line numbers may be different for SDL.
8. Click the Generate button. The requisition displays in a pdf file.
9. Scroll through the requisition to view the details.
10. Write the requisition numbers here: _________________________. Note: The number is in the
top left of the pdf next to Purchase Requisition. Also, Automatic Reorder is noted indicating
that a purchase order is automatically generated when stock hits the reorder level.
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 249
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 11. Click X in the top-right corner of the requisition to close it. You return to the Generate
Requisitions screen.

Part 3: Approve the requisition

1. Select Materials > Requisitions. The Requisition screen opens.
2. Select <your part requisition> from List View. Note that the status is Unfinished.
3. Select Approved from the Status drop-down list.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

250 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 7.7: Create and copy a requisition
In this exercise, you will create and copy a requisition.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a requisition header

1. Select Materials > Requisitions. The Requisition screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Requisition screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID Requisition in the Requisition field. Note: EAM will
automatically generate a requisition number after you save the record.
4. Select <your store> from the Store field.
5. Select <any employee> in the Requested By field.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Add parts to a requisition

1. Click the Parts tab.
2. Select <your part> in the Part field.
3. Type 1 in the Requested Qty (UOM) field. Note: There is a value in the field. You can type over it
if the value is different than what you are requesting.
4. Type 40.00 in the Price (UOM) field.
5. Select <three days from today’s date> in the Requested Before field.
6. Click Submit. The Requisition Parts list is updated.

Part 3: Add services for hired labor to a requisition

Note: The work order used in this exercise must have an activity associated with it, the Hired
Labor check box is selected, and a supplier is entered
1. Click the Services tab.
2. Click the Lookup icon in the Work Order-Activity field.
3. Select <your work order> in the list of work orders.
4. Click OK.
5. Select BOIL from the Work-Order Activity field.
6. Click OK.
7. Type 500.00 in the Price field.
8. Select <three days from today’s date> in the Requested Before field.
9. Select Hours from service in the Type drop-down list.
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 251
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 10. Type 10 in the Hours Requested field.
11. Click Submit. The Services list is updated.

Part 4: Create a work order and activity for requisition services

1. Select Add Service Line.
2. Select Actions > Create Work Order/Activity. The Create Work Order/Activity pop-up window
opens.
3. Select <your asset 1> in the Equipment field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Work Order for Services in the W/O Description field.
5. Select Released - Ready-to-Schedule/Assign from the Status drop-down list.
6. Select Breakdown in the Type drop-down list.
7. Select <two days from today’s date> in the Sched. Start Date field.
8. Select <three days from today’s date> in the Sched. End Date field.
9. Select <your trade> from the Trade field.
10. Select <two days from today’s date> in the Activity Start Date field in the Activity Details
section.
11. Select <three days from today’s date> in the Activity End Date field Activity Details section.
Note: You may receive a message that the Activity Start Date and Activity End Date occurred
outside the date range specified by Scheduled Start Date and Scheduled End Date. Click Yes to
continue.
12. Type 10 in the Estimated Hours field.
13. Type 3 in the People Required field.
14. Click Submit. You return to the Service Details section of the Requisition screen. A work order
number displays and values populate the Service Details section.
15. Type 50.00 in the Price field.
16. Click Submit. The Services list is updated.

Part 5: Copy a requisition

1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Select Approved in the Status field.
3. Click Save.
4. Right-click anywhere on the screen in Record View. A list of options displays.

Using the Copy Record icon copies the requisition header. The Copy Requisition
option allows you to copy the entire requisition.

252 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
5. Select Copy Requisition from the list of options. The Copy Requisition pop-up window opens.
6. Type <your assigned student ID> Copy Requisition 2 in the Requisition field. A confirmation
message displays.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click the Parts tab. All the parts information is copied.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 253

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 7.8: Review automatic purchase order generation
This demonstration shows how to automatic purchase order generation.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: View the activity for a part

1. Select Purchasing > Process > Generate POs. The Generate POs screen opens.
2. Select ORG1 in the Organization field.
3. Select <any employee> in the Originator field.
4. Click Process. A list opens enabling you to select items for the purchase order.
5. Select <two to three> lines.
6. Click Generate.
7. Select Purchasing > Purchase Order.
8. View the purchase order(s) you have generated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

254 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 8.1: Approve/reject a part requisition
In this exercise, you will approve/reject a part requisition.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a requisition

1. Select Materials > Requisitions. The Requisition screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Requisition screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> EAM Requisition to Approve in the field to the right of the
Requisition field.
4. Select <your store> in the Store field.
5. Select <any employee> in the Requested By field.
6. Select <your assigned student ID>@INFOR-EDU.COM in the Default Approver field. For
example, if your assigned student ID is ST01, select ST01, ST02, select ST02. Note: You must
select the user ID that you used to access EAM.
7. Click the Parts tab. The requisition number displays next to Requisition in the left corner of the
screen.
8. Select <a part of your choice> in the Part field. Note: A pop-up window may open with
messages, “The part not held in requesting store and Part does not exist in the selected
supplier’s catalog. Record will be created.” Click OK.
9. Verify that the following fields are populated. If not, populate with the following values.
• Type <a quantity of your choice> in the Requested Qty (UOM) field.
• Type <a price of your choice> in the Price (UOM) field.
10. Select <tomorrow’s date> in the Requested Before field.
11. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated for the requisition.
12. Click the Record View tab.
13. Select Awaiting Approval in the Status drop-down list.
14. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
15. Write your requisition number here: ____________________________.

Part 2: Copy a requisition

1. Right-click anywhere on the screen in Record View. A list of options displays.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 255

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Using the Copy Record icon copies the requisition header. The Copy Requisition
option allows you to copy the entire requisition.

2. Select Copy Requisition from the list of options. The Copy Requisition pop-up window opens.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> EAM Requisition to Reject in the field to the right of the
Requisition field.
4. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays.
5. Select Awaiting Approval in the Status drop-down list.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
7. Write your requisition number here: ____________________________.

Part 3: Approve a requisition

1. Select Purchasing > Review Part Requisitions. The Review Part Requisition screen opens.
2. Click Run.
3. Select the check box beside <your requisition to approve>.
4. Click Approve. A confirmation message displays.

Part 4: Reject a requisition

1. Select the check box beside <your requisition to reject>.
2. Click Reject. The Reject Reason pop-up window opens.
3. Type Not Budgeted in the Reject Reason field.
4. Click OK. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

256 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 8.2: Create and modify a purchase order
In this exercise, you will create and modify a purchase order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a purchase order header

1. Select Purchasing > Purchase Orders. The Purchase Order screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Purchase Order screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID Purchase Order> in the field to the right of the Purchase Order
field.
4. Verify that Unfinished is selected in the Status drop-down list. If not, select it.
5. Select <your store> in the Store field.
6. Select <any employee> in the Originator field.
7. Select <two weeks from today’s date> in the Due Date field.
8. Select <your supplier 2> in the Supplier field. The Currency and Exchange Rate fields are
populated with values because they are associated with <your supplier>.
9. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
10. Write your purchase order number here: _______________________________.

Part 2: Add part details to the purchase order

1. Click the Parts tab.
2. Select <your part> in the Part field. Note: You may receive a message indicating the part does
not exist in the supplier’s catalog. Click OK to this message.
3. Select Stock items in the Type drop-down list.
4. Type 1 in the Purchase Qty. (UOP) field.
5. Type 1 in the Requested Qty. (UOM) field.
6. Type <any price> in the Price field.
7. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Part 3: Create new parts for a purchase order

1. Select Actions > Create Part in the Part Details section of the screen.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> New Part for Purchase Order in the field to the right of the Part
field.
3. Select Stock items in the Type drop-down list.
4. Type 3 in the Purchase Qty. (UOP) field. Note that 3 populates the Requested Qty. (UOM) field.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 257

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 5. Type 5.00 in the Price (UOP) field.
6. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated with the new part. Note: The part number has the prefix
“N.”

Part 4: Add service details to the purchase order

1. Click the Services tab.
2. Click Actions > Create Work Order/Activity. The Create Work Order – Activity pop-up
window opens.
3. Select <your asset 1> in the Equipment field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Work Order for PO Services in the WO Description field.
5. Select <your assigned student ID> TRADE in the Trade field.
6. Type 1 in the Estimated Hours field.
7. Type 1 in the People Required field.
8. Click Submit. The Create Work Order – Activity pop-up window closes.
9. Click Submit. The work order activity is added to the list.

Part 5: Approve the purchase order

1. Click the Record View tab.
2. Select Approved in the Status drop-down list.
3. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

258 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 8.3: Create a purchase order from a requisition
This demonstration shows how to create a purchase order from a requisition.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Materials > Requisitions. The Requisition screen opens.
2. Click Run.
3. Select 10002 from List View.
4. Right-click anywhere on the Requisition screen. A list of options displays.
5. Select Generate PO from the list of options. A confirmation message displays.
6. Select Purchasing > Purchase Orders.
7. Click Run.
8. Select <your purchase order>.
9. Click the Parts tab. The Parts list displays because it carried over from the requisition.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 259

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 8.4: Copy a purchase order
This demonstration shows how to copy a purchase order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Purchasing > Purchase Orders. The Purchase Order screen opens.
2. Click Run.
3. Select 10001 from List View. The 10001-SPOT BUY record displays in Record View.
4. Right-click anywhere on the 10001 record. A list of options displays.
5. Select Copy PO from the list of options. The Copy PO pop-up window opens.
6. Review the Copy Record Options.
7. Type <your assigned student ID> PO COPY in the New PO Description field.
8. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays. The purchase order you copied displays in List
View.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

260 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 8.5: Receive services on the Book PO Labor screen
In this exercise, you will receive service on the Book PO Labor screen.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Book PO labor

1. Select Work > Process > Book PO Labor. The Book PO Labor screen opens.
2. Select <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order in the Purchase Order field. Note: This is
the PO you created in Exercise 8.2.
3. Select search in the PO Line field. The PO Lines pop-up window opens.
4. Select 30 Hours from service.
5. Click OK. The PO Line field has a value of 30.
6. Type 1 in the Hours Worked field.
7. Click Add to List. The PO is added to the Purchase Order lines and a Book Labor button
displays.
8. Click Book Labor. The message: Vendor Labor was booked successfully displays.

Part 2: View the PO

1. Select Purchasing > Purchase Orders.
2. Click Run.
3. Select <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order in List View. Details of the record display.
Note: The status is automatically changed to Partially Received due to the labor we booked
against the PO.
4. Click the Services tab. Note that the line has been received.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 261

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 8.6: Receive services on the Book Vendor Hours tab
This demonstration shows how to receive services on the Book Vendor Hours screen.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user
account. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Work > Work Orders.
1. Select Search within All Work Order in the List View Dataspy. All work orders list.
2. Select <Demo 8.6 services needed work order> in the Work Order field. Note: The work order
number is Work Order for Demo 8.6 Book Vendor Hours.
3. Select More. Additional tab options display.
4. Select Book Vendor Hours. Book Vendor Hours becomes a tab.
5. Select your <Demo 8.6 purchase order> in the PO-Line field. The Activity field populates with
the associated activity. Note: The purchase order number is Purchase Order for Demo 8.6
Book Vendor Hours.
6. Type 2 in the Hours Worked field.
7. The Activity is listed.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

262 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 8.7: Receive parts
In this exercise, you will receive parts.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Receive parts

1. Select Purchasing > PO Receipts.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order Receipt in the unlabeled PO Receipt
description field.
3. Select <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order in the Purchase Order field. The Supplier
and Store fields are automatically populated.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Click the Active Lines tab.
6. Select Actions > Retrieve Parts (Skip Packing Slip).
7. Select the first line in the top section of the screen.
8. Review the Active Line Details for the first line including:
• Bin – is one listed?
• Receipt Qty (UOM) – did you receive the part?
9. Select Actions > Approve Part. The first line is removed from the top section of the screen.
10. Select the second line in the top section of the screen. This part does not have a bin.
11. Select <your assigned student ID> BIN 1 in the Bin field.
12. Click Submit. The changes are saved.
13. Select Actions > Approve Part. The first line is removed from the top section of the screen.

Part 2: View processed parts

1. Click the Processed Lines tab. The two parts you received are listed.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 263

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 3: Receive non-PO
1. Select Purchasing > Non-PO Receipts. The Non-PO Receipts screen opens.
2. Type <your assigned student ID> Non Purchase Order Receipt in the Non-PO Receipt field.
3. Select <your assigned student ID> SUPPLIER in the Supplier field.
4. Select <your assigned student ID> STORE in the Store field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
6. Click the Parts tab.
7. Select <your assigned student ID> New Parts Number in List View.
8. Type 1 in the Receipt Qty field.
9. Type 13.82 in the Price field.
10. Click Submit. The part is added to the list at the top of the screen.
11. Click the Record View tab.
12. Select Approved in the Status field.
13. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

264 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 8.8: Return parts to a supplier
In this exercise, you will return parts to a supplier.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Return a part

1. Select Purchasing > Supplier Returns. The Supplier Return screen opens.
2. Click New Record. A blank record displays.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> Supplier Return in the Description field.
4. Select <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order in the Purchase Order field. The Supplier
and Store fields are automatically populated.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
6. Click the Parts tab.
7. Select Actions > Retrieve Parts. A parts list displays at the top of the screen.
8. Select <your assigned student ID> Part in the Part field. Details display in Part Details at the
bottom of the screen.
9. Type 1 in the Return Qty field.
10. Select <your N part line> at the top of the screen.
11. Select Remove Part to remove from the supplier return.
12. Click the Record View tab.
13. Select Approved in the Status field.
14. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: View the returned parts

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Select <your assigned student ID> Part. Details display in Part Details at the bottom of the
screen.
3. Click the Transactions tab. A line is listed with the Type as Return to supplier for the part.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 265

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 8.9: Create and book invoice vouchers
This demonstration shows how to create and book invoice vouchers.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Purchasing > Invoice Vouchers. The Invoice Voucher screen opens.
2. Click New Record. A blank record displays.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> EAM Invoice in the Invoice Voucher field.
4. Type 76653 in the Supplier Invoice field.
5. Select <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order in Purchase Order field. The Supplier
field is automatically populated.
6. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
7. Click the Lines tab.
8. Select Actions > Import Lines.
9. Select the check boxes for the bottom two lines in the list.
10. Click Attach. Two lines are listed at the top of the screen.
11. Select the first line to review the fields in Invoice Voucher Details.
12. Select the second. Details display in Invoice Voucher Details.
13. Select Actions > Extra Charges/Discounts. The Extra Charges/Discounts pop-up window
opens.
14. Review the Extra Charges/Discounts pop-up window. This is where you would configure
additional charges and/or discounts.
15. Click Close.
16. Click the Costs tab.
17. Select Pre tax extra charge/discount in the Type field.
18. Type -5 in the Amount field.
Note: A negative amount indicates a discount and a positive amount indicates a charge.
19. Click Submit.

266 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
20. Click the Record View tab.
21. Select Matched/completed in the Status field.
22. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 267

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 8.10: View purchase order transaction and revision history
This demonstration shows how to view purchase order transaction and revision history.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Review PO transactions

1. Select Purchasing > Purchase Orders. The Purchase Orders screen opens.
2. Select <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order in the Purchase Order field.
3. Click More. Additional tab options display.
4. Select Transactions. Transactions becomes a tab.
5. Review the lines. Note that the following types display: Goods received and Return to supplier.

Part 2: Review revision history

1. Select Purchasing > PO Revision History. The PO Revision History screen opens.
2. Click Run in List View. Purchase orders list.
3. Note that 10001 has Revisions 1 and 2.
Note: For SDL, note that 10026 has revisions.
4. Click each revision of 10001 and notice that there is a Total PO Value difference in the two
records.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

268 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 9.1: Personalize the Inbox
In this exercise, you will personalize the Inbox.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Specify the default Start Center Inbox tab

1. Click the gray down arrow in the Header menu next to the Work menu item. A list of options
displays.
2. Select Start Center in the list of options. Inbox, Charts, and KPIs display on the screen.
3. Click the Inbox Folder drop-down list. Maintenance, Management, and Operations display in a
list.
4. Select any one of the three options (i.e., Maintenance, Management, or Operations).
5. Click the Save as Default icon at the top of the Inbox pane. The displayed tab is set as the
default tab.

Part 2: Add entries to the Start Center Inbox

1. Click the Personalize icon at the top of the Inbox pane. The Personalize Your Inbox pop-up
window opens.
2. Type <a sequence number> in the Sequence field in the Inbox Entry Details section of the
screen. Note: You can also use the one EAM automatically provided.
3. Click the Lookup icon in the Inbox Code field. The Inbox Code pop-up window opens and
displays a list of available code options.
4. Select <a code of your choice> from the list.
5. Click OK. The code you selected populates the Inbox Code field.
6. Click the Folder drop-down list.
7. Select the tab (i.e., Operations, Maintenance, or Management) on which to place the Inbox
entry.
8. Select the Auto Refresh check box. Selecting Auto Refresh enables the automatic refresh of
the Inbox every time the Start Center is invoked.
9. Click the Submit icon. The Inbox Entries list is saved and updated.
10. Click Close. You return to the Start Center.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 269

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 3: Access screens from the Start Center Inbox
1. Double-click the Inbox entry, which you just added. A list of records displays matching the Inbox
count.
2. Click the gray down arrow next to Work in the Header. A list of options displays.
3. Select Start Center. The Start Center displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

270 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 9.2: Personalize the KPIs
In this exercise, you will personalize the KPIs.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Add KPI to Start Center

1. Click the gray down arrow in the Header menu next to the Work menu item. A list of options
displays.
2. Select Start Center in the list of options.
3. Click the Personalize icon at the top of the KPIs pane. The Personalize Your KPIs pop-up
window opens.
4. Type <a sequence number> in the Sequence field in the KPI Entry Details section of the
screen. Note: You can also use the one EAM automatically provided.
5. Select <a code of your choice> in the KPI Code field.
6. Click Submit. The KPI Entries list is saved and updated.
7. Click Close.

Part 2: Access screens from Start Center KPIs

1. Double-click the KPI <Work Order Utilization (%)>.The screen associated with the KPI displays.
2. Click the gray down arrow in the Header menu. A list of options displays.
3. Select Start Center in the list of options. The Start Center displays.

EAM only supports .gif files for the images displayed for KPIs on the Start Center.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 271

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 9.3: Display a chart
This demonstration shows how to display a chart.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Click the gray down arrow in the Header menu next to the Work menu item. A list of options
displays.
2. Select Start Center from the list of options.
3. Select ORG1 in the Organization field in the Charts pane.
4. Select Work Orders Reported by Dept from the Chart Type drop-down list. This is the type of
chart you want to display.
5. Select Months in the Chart Period drop-down list.
6. Select All in the Department drop-down list.
7. Slide the Show Year/Year slider to the right. A chart and graph display based on your field
inputs.
8. Hover the mouse over each the chart and graph to view the details. Note: A job runs every 24
hours that updates charts.

The selection criteria described above differs from chart type to chart type.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

272 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 9.4: Manage a Dataspy
In this exercise, you will manage a Dataspy.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Copy an existing Dataspy

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click Expand Right. EAM enables the Dataspy.
3. Click the Dataspy drop-down list located below the toolbar.
4. Select All Work Orders from the Dataspy drop-down list on the filter bar.
5. Click Run. A list of all work orders displays.
6. Click Edit next to the Dataspy drop-down list. The Dataspy pop-up window opens.
7. Click Copy.
8. Type <your assigned student ID> Dataspy in the field under Dataspy.
9. Click the first filter drop-down list.
10. Select Status.
11. Click the filter drop-down list located to the right of the equal sign (=).
12. Select Completed.
13. Click Sort in the left menu to view and accept the order of the Dataspy results.
14. Click Layout in the left menu.
15. Select Assign To in the Available Fields list.
16. Click the Add Selected icon to move Assign To to the Visible Fields list.
17. Select Date Created in the Available Fields list.
18. Click the Add Selected icon to move Date Created to the Visible Fields list.
19. Click Save. The Dataspy is saved. A list reflecting your filter criteria displays the results in List
View.

Part 2: Modify the layout of the Dataspy

1. Select <your Dataspy> from the Dataspy drop-down list.
2. Click Edit. The Dataspy pop-up window opens.
3. Click AND underneath the filter field. The toggle changes AND to OR.
4. Click the first filter drop-down list.
5. Select Status.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 273

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 6. Click the filter drop-down list located to the right of the equal sign (=).
7. Select Released - Ready to Schedule/Assign.
8. Click Layout in the left menu.
9. Select Date Completed in the Available Fields list.
10. Click the Add Selected icon to move Date Completed to the Visible Fields list.
11. Drag fields in the Visible Fields list to rearrange the order.
12. Click Save. The Dataspy is saved and displays the results in List View.
13. Click the Dataspy drop-down list. The available Dataspys display including the one you just
created.

Part 3: Delete a saved Dataspy

1. Select <your Dataspy>.
2. Click Edit. The Dataspy pop-up window opens.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message indicating the Dataspy will be deleted.
5. Click the Dataspy drop-down list to confirm that <your Dataspy> is no longer in the Dataspy
drop-down list.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

274 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 9.5: Run a report
This demonstration shows how to run a report.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Materials > Reports > List of Stock. The List of Stock screen opens and report
parameters display. Note: You can also run reports from other selections on the header.
2. Click the Lookup icon in the Organization field. The Organizations pop-up window opens.
3. Select ORG1. Note: You can also double-click ORG1.
4. Click OK. ORG1 displays in the ORG field.
5. View the Report Options. Note: Use the defaults for Report Options.
6. Click the Print Preview icon. The List of Stock report opens as a pdf file. Note: You can also
click the Print Record icon.
7. Scroll through the List of Stock report to view the details.
8. Click the drop-down arrow located in the top-right corner of the screen. A list of options for
viewing the report in other formats displays:
• HTML
• PDF
• Excel Options
9. Click the right-facing arrow beside Excel Options. A list of Excel options displays:
• View in Excel 2007 Data
• View in Excel 2007 Format
• View in Excel 2002 Format
• View in CSV Format
10. Click X in the top-right corner of the List of Stock report to close it. You return to the List of
Stock screen.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 275

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Exercise 10.1: Create a project budget
In this exercise, you will define initial project information.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise
1.1.

Exercise steps
1. Select Work > Projects > Project Budgets. The Project Budget screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Project Budget screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> PROJECT BUDGET in the Project Budget field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Project Budget in the field to the right of the Project Budget
field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

276 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 10.2: Set up a project
This demonstration shows how to set up a project.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Define project basics

1. Select Work > Projects > Projects. The Project screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Project screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> PROJECT in the Project field.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> Project in the field to the right of the Project field.
5. Select <any employee> in the Coordinator field.
6. Select <today’s date> in the Estimated Start Date field.
7. Select <three weeks after to today’s date> in the Estimated End Date field.
8. Select <today’s date> in the Actual Start Date field.
9. Type 50,000 in the Current Budget field.
10. Select <today’s date> in the Budget Date field.
11. Click the Budgets tab. A confirmation message displays that <your budget> is saved.
12. Select <your budget> in the Budget field in the Budget Details section of the screen.
13. Type 50,000 in the Budgeted Amount field.
14. Press the Tab key. The amount of 50,000 automatically populates the Estimate to Complete
field.
15. Click Submit. The Budgets list is updated.
16. Click the Record View tab.
17. Select Approved from the Status drop-down list.
18. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 277

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 2: Grant purchasing authorization permissions for a project
1. Select More > User Authorization. User Authorization displays as a tab.
2. Select <your assigned user ID> in the User field.
3. Select the Approver check box. This indicates the authorized user can approve purchase
requisitions and purchase orders for the project.
4. Click Submit. the User Authorizations list is updated.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

278 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 10.3: Create a project work order
This demonstration shows how to create a project work order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

Part 1: Create a new project work order

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Work Order screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> Project Work Order in the unlabeled description field to the right
of the Work Order field.
4. Select <any equipment> in the Equipment field. Required fields are populated with values.
5. Select EL - Electrical in the Trade field in the Activity section.
6. Type 1 in the Estimated Hours field.
7. Type 1 in the People Required field.
8. Select <your project and project budget> in the Project-Budget field.
9. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
10. Write the work order number here. _____________________.

Part 2: Associate existing work order with project

1. Select <your assigned student ID> Work Request in List View.
2. Click the Record View tab.
3. Select <your project and budget> in the Project-Budget field.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 279

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 3: View work orders associated with project
1. Select Work > Projects > Projects. The Project screen opens.
2. Select Approved Projects in the Dataspy.
3. Click Run. A list of approved projects displays.
4. Select <your project>.
5. Click the Work Orders tab. The work orders associated with the project displays.

In order to generate a project shutdown of a work order, multi-organization security

(MOS) must be enabled for shutdown as this setting is organization-specific.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

280 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Demo 10.4: Review project-associated purchase orders
This demonstration shows how to review project-associated purchase orders.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and are at the Start Center page for your user account.
If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps
1. Select Purchasing > Purchase Orders. The Purchase Order screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Purchase Order screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID> Purchase Order for Project in the field to the right of the
Purchase Order field.
4. Select FAC-ELEC in the Store field.
5. Select DPRINCE in the Originator field.
6. Select <two days from today’s date> in the Due Date field.
7. Select AIRCENTERSSC in the Supplier field.
8. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
9. Click the Parts tab.
10. Select 1000-COUPLING BLK in the Parts field. Note: You may get a message indicating that the
part is not held in requesting store. Click OK.
11. Type <any price> in the Price (UOP) field.
12. Select <your work order-activity associated with the project> in the Work Order-Activity
field.
13. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated. The line item is associated with the work order which is
associated with the project. Note the value in the Project-Budget field.
14. Select Work > Projects > Projects. The Project screen opens.
15. Select Approved Projects from the Dataspy drop-down list.
16. Press F8. All approved projects display in List View.
17. Select <your project>.
18. Select More > Purchase Orders. The Purchase Orders tab displays. Purchase orders
associated with the project display.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 281

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 Scenario
In this scenario, you will practice the fundamental procedures that represent the core
functionality of EAM. You are encouraged to experiment with this scenario to understand
system behavior and apply the knowledge and skill you have learned in this course. The
detailed steps provide the values for you to use.

Considerations:
• Ensure you are logged in to EAM and it is open to the Start page. If not, refer to Exercise 1.1.

Scenario steps

Part 1: Create an asset and system equipment records

1. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Asset screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Select Equipment > Systems. The System screen opens.
6. Click New Record. The System screen displays as a blank screen.
7. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create a system asset.
8. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 2: Link equipment records from part 1 to a hierarchy

1. Click the Structure tab.
2. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to link equipment records.
3. Click Run. A list displays of assets that do not have a parent and are not children of other
equipment.
4. Type <your assigned student ID> in the Code field of the filter row.
5. Press Enter. Your scenario asset displays.
6. Drag <your scenario asset> to <your scenario system> (child).

Part 3: Create a part

1. Select Materials > Parts. The Part screen opens.
2. Click New Record. The Part screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type or select the values from the table below to create a part.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Click the Suppliers tab.
6. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to associate your part to a supplier.
7. Click Submit. The Suppliers list is updated.

282 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 8. Select More > Manufacturers.
9. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to associate the part to a preferred
manufacturer.
10. Click Submit. The Manufacturers list is updated.

Part 4: Set up the part in an existing storeroom

Note: You will define the average price, reorder level, and order quantity.
1. Click the Stores tab.
2. Type or select the values from the in Lesson 10 to set up the part in an existing storeroom.
3. Click Submit. The Stores list is updated.

Part 5: Assign the part to a bin and enter quantity on hand

Note: The on-hand quantity must be greater than zero.
1. Click the Stock tab.
2. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to assign the part to a bin and enter the
quantity on hand.
3. Click Submit. The Stock list is updated.

Part 6: Create a PM schedule for the asset you created in Part 1

1. Select Work > WO Planning > PM Schedules. The PM Schedule screen opens.
2. Click Create New Record. The PM Schedule screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create a PM schedule for the asset.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Click the Equipment tab.
6. Select <your scenario asset> from the Equipment field.
7. Select <today’s date> from the Due Date field.
8. Click Submit. The Equipment list is updated.

Part 7: Generate a PM work order for the PM schedule you created in Part 6
1. Select Work > Process > Release Individual PM WOs. The Release Individual PM WOs
screen opens.
2. Click Run.
3. Scroll through the list of PM work orders to find <your scenario PM schedule>.
4. Select <your scenario PM schedule>.
5. Type R in the WO Status field.
6. Click the Update PMs button. A confirmation message displays.
7. Write the Work Order number here: _____________________________.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 283

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
Part 8: Create and approve a project
Note: Use the project budget you created earlier in this lesson.
1. Select Work > Projects > Projects. The Project screen opens.
2. Click Create New Record. The Project screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create your project.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Click the Budgets tab.
6. Select <your project budget> from the Budget field.
7. Type 15000 in the Budgeted Amount field.
8. Click Submit.
9. Click the Record View tab.
10. Select Approved from the Status drop-down list.
11. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 9: Create a work order and associate it to your project

Note: Create two activities for the work order and select the Hired Labor check box for the second
activity.
1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Click Create New Record. The Work Order screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create a work order.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Write the Work Order number here: _____________________________.
6. Click the Activities tab.
7. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create the first activity.
8. Click Submit. The Activities list is updated.
9. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create the second activity.
10. Click Submit. The Activities list is updated.

Part 10: Schedule an employee for your work activity

1. Select More > Schedule Labor.
2. Click Add Schedule.
3. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to schedule the employee.
4. Click Submit. The Schedule Labor list is updated.

Part 11: Issue the part you created in Part 3 to work order activity you created in Part 9
1. Click the Parts tab.
2. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to issue the part.

284 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 3. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.

Part 12: Book labor hours for the work order activity you created in Part 9
1. Click the Book Labor tab.
2. Select CKENT from the Employee field.
3. Type 1 in the Hours Worked field.
4. Click Submit. The Booked Labor list is updated.

Part 13: Create and approve purchase order

Note: You will create and approve a purchase order for the stock using the part you created in part 3 for
the work order created in part 9; direct materials creating an N part for the work order activity you created
in part 9; and service (hours from service) for the second work order activity you created in part 9.
1. Select Purchasing > Purchase Orders. The Purchase Order screen opens.
2. Click Create New Record. The Purchase Order screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create a purchase order.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Write the Purchase Order number here: _____________________________
6. Click the Parts tab.
7. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create the part.
8. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.
9. Select Direct materials from the Type drop-down list.
10. Select Actions > Create Part.
11. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to create the part for direct materials.
12. Click Submit. The Parts list is updated.
13. Click the Services tab.
14. Type or select the values from the table in Lesson 10 to add services.
15. Click Submit. The Services list is updated.
16. Click the Record View tab.
17. Select Approved from the Status drop-down list.
18. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 14: Receive materials for the PO you created

1. Select Purchasing > PO Receipts. The PO Receipt screen opens.
2. Click Create New Record. The PO Receipt screen displays as a blank screen.
3. Type <your assigned student ID Scenario PO Receipt> in the field to the right of the PO Receipt
field.
4. Select <your scenario purchase order> from the Purchase Order field.
5. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 285
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 6. Click the Active Lines tab.
7. Select Actions > Retrieve Parts (Skip Packing Slip). The Active Lines list is updated.
8. Select Actions > Approve All Parts.
9. Click the Record View tab. The value in the Status field is Approved.

Part 15: Book PO labor hours for the PO you created

1. Select Work > Process > Book PO Labor. The Book PO Labor screen opens.
2. Select <your scenario purchase order> in the Purchase Order field.
3. Select 30 Hours from Service in the PO Line field.
4. Type 1 in the Hours Worked field.
5. Click Add to List. The Purchase Order list is updated.
6. Click Book Labor at the bottom right-hand corner of the screen. A confirmation screen displays.

Part 16: Close work orders you created in parts 7 and 9

1. Select Work > Work Orders. The Work Order screen opens.
2. Select <your assigned student ID> Scenario PM Schedule from List View. Details display in
Record View.
3. Select Completed from the Status drop-down list.
4. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.
5. Select <your assigned student ID> Scenario Project Work Order from List View. Details
display in Record View.
6. Select Completed from the Status drop-down list.
7. Click Save Record. A confirmation message displays.

Part 17: View work order cost, project cost, and equipment cost and events
1. Select <your assigned student ID> Scenario Project Work Order from List View.
2. Click the Cost Summary tab. Costs display in itemized columns.
3. Select Work > Projects > Projects. The Projects screen opens.
4. Select Open Projects from the Dataspy drop-down list.
5. Click Run. Open projects display in List View.
6. Select < your assigned student ID> Scenario Project from List View.
7. Select More > Costs. Costs for the project display.
8. Select More > Project Summary Chart. Project Summary Chart for the project displays
comparing Current Budget to Approved Budget and Actual Cost to Date.
9. Click the Record View tab.
10. View the costs in the Budget Details section. The Budget Approved and Estimate to
Complete field values display here.
11. Select Equipment > Assets. The Asset screen opens.

286 Exercises and demos

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
 12. Select <your assigned student ID> SCENARIO ASSET from List View.
13. Click the Costs tab. A breakdown and preventative maintenance display for <your scenario
asset>.
14. Click Refresh Cost Data. The costs are updated.
15. Click the Events tab. A listing of what has occurred for this equipment displays.

Part 18: View equipment history

1. Select Equipment > Reports > Equipment History. The Equipment History screen opens.
2. Select <your assigned student ID> SCENARIO ASSET in the Equipment field.
3. Click Print Preview. The Equipment History report opens as a pdf file providing information of
worked performed on the asset.
4. Click X in the top-right corner of the Equipment History report to close it. You return to the
Equipment History screen.

Click here to return to the lesson content.

EAM: Foundation Training Workbook 287

© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.
288 Exercises and demos
© 2019 Infor Education. All rights reserved. No part of this Training Workbook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, without written permission.